2015 CRTC Range Regulation
Range
Regulation
“The Warriors Choice”
COL Scott St. Sauver, Garrison Commander
STATE OF MINNESOTA
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
CAMP RIPLEY, MN
1 October 2014
UNCLASSIFIED
i
State of Minnesota
Department of Military Affairs
Camp Ripley Training Center
Camp Ripley Little Falls, MN 56345
2015 CRTC Range Regulation
Range Operations
SUMMARY
The 2015 Camp Ripley Range Regulation is a summary of policies and procedures set forth by AR 385-63, DA
Pamphlet 385-63, NGR 385-63, AR 385-64, DA Pamphlet 385-64, AR 210-10, TC25-8, and any other regulations
pertaining to the use and operations of the Field Training Area, Live-Fire ranges, Non-Fire ranges, and ammunition
usage in the Installation. All persons entering the Field Training Area are subject to the regulations set forth in this
document.
Persons subject to the Uniform Code of Military Justice will be prosecuted for violations of this regulation. Any
other persons who violate this Regulation may be prosecuted by administrative action by the Installation
Commander or other appropriate military or civilian authority.
SUGGESTED IMPROVEMENTS
Users are invited to send comments, suggested improvements, or updates by email to Range Control at
ng.mn.mnarng.list.crc-range-control@mail.mil.
APPLICABILITY
This regulation is applicable to any agency, military or civilian, that utilizes any installation facility outside the
cantonment area, to include airspace up to 20,000 feet mean sea level.
SUPERSESSION
This regulation supersedes 2013 CRTC Range Regulation, dated 19 July 2013.
SCOTT A. ST. SAUVER
COL, FA, MNARNG
Garrison Commander
ii
SUMMARY of CHANGE
CRTC Range Regulation
Range Operations / Safety
This revision is a major revision, dated 1 September 2014

Changed Composite Risk Management (CRM) to Risk Management (throughout)

Provides clarification on when Range Control requires a Risk Management sheet (throughout)

FM 5-19 is obsolete and replaced by ATP 5-19 changed (throughout)

DA Form 7566 Composite Risk Assessment replaced by DD Form 2977 Deliberate Risk Assessment
Worksheet

Updated left and right barrier colors on standard ranges (throughout)

Updated information on Medical Requirements for Range Operations (para 1.6)

Provides clarification to utilizing Training Areas (para 1.13)

Provides clarification to Rappel Tower operations (para 2.14)

Updated information on Mortar Operations down range (Chapter 9)

Updated information on Artillery Operations down range (Chapter 10)

Provide clarification to Greywater Procedures (para 18.12)

Updated Observation Point clarification and use of down range (throughout)

Added information to A-6 Confidence Course regarding the use of mats to the Appendix

Changed IED Lane to React to Contact Lane

Added Range Control Tables OIC/RSO Requirements, Declinations, Medical Requirements, Personal
Protective Equipment, and Quick Reference Table to the Appendix

Removed tower landline phone numbers (throughout)

Makes administrative changes (throughout)
iii
Contents (Listed by paragraph and page number)
Chapter 1
Introduction, page 1
Purpose 1.1, page 1
Range Safety Certification Program 1.2, page 1
Responsibilities 1.3, page 1
Risk Management – Safety 1.4, page 5
Accident/Incident 1.5, page 5
Medical Requirements 1.6, page 5
Requesting Ranges and Training Areas 1.7, page 5
Access to the Ranges and Field Training Areas 1.8, page 6
Speed Limit Enforcement 1.9, page 6
White Light Usage Policy 1.10, page 7
Privately Owned Vehicles (POVs) 1.11, page 7
Fishing 1.12, page 7
Use of Field Training Areas 1.13, page 7
Clearance of Field Training Areas 1.14, page 8
Convoy/Road Marches 1.15, page 8
Communications 1.16, page 9
Observation Points (OPs) 1.17, page 9
OE 254 Antennas 1.18, page 10
Severe Weather 1.19, page 10
Maps 1.20, page 10
Chapter 2
Ranges, page 11
Restricting Access to Impact Areas 2.1, page 11
Warning Signs, Barriers, Markers, and Flags 2.2, page 11
Range Use by Non-Military/Civilian Agencies 2.3, page 11
Coordinating Use of Special Use Airspace 2.4, page 12
UAS Operations 2.5, page 13
Coordinating Use of Navigable Waterways 2.6, page 13
Ammunition and Explosive Items on Ranges 2.7, page 14
Misfire Procedures/Reporting 2.8, page 16
Unexploded Ordnance (UXO) Reporting 2.9, page 16
Disposition of Ammunition and Explosives involved in Malfunctions and Accidents 2.10, page 16
Ammunition Turn-in Procedures 2.11, page 16
Range Personal Protective Equipment Requirements 2.12, page 17
Range Targets 2.13, page 17
Rappel Tower 2.14, page 18
Chapter 3
Danger Zones, page 20
General 3.1, page 20
Authorization for Personnel within Danger Zones 3.2, page 20
Chapter 4
Small Arms & Machine Guns, page 21
Firing Conditions 4.1, page 21
Overhead Fire 4.2, page 21
Flanking Fire 4.3, page 22
Blank Ammunition 4.4, page 22
Machine Guns 4.5, page 22
Automated Ranges Night Firing Procedures 4.6, page 23
Unestablished Ranges 4.7, page 23
Additional Information 4.8, page 23
References 4.9, page 23
iv
Chapter 5
Grenades and Grenade Launchers, page 24
Hand Grenades 5.1, page 24
Hand Grenade Range (HGR) (Live Grenade Familiarization) 5.2, page 24
Grenade Launchers and Grenade Machine Guns 5.3, page 25
References 5.4, page 25
Chapter 6
Antitank Rockets, page 26
Firing Conditions 6.1, page 26
References 6.2, page 26
Chapter 7
Antitank Guided Missiles, page 27
Tow Missiles 7.1, page 27
Dragon 7.2, page 27
Javelin 7.3, page 28
References 7.4, page 28
Chapter 8
Tank/Fighting Vehicle Gunnery, page 29
General 8.1, page 29
Tank/Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) Firing Conditions 8.2, page 29
M250/257 Smoke Grenade Launchers 8.3, page 29
Weapons Effect Signature Simulator (Hoffman Device) 8.4, page 29
Hazardous Impulse Exposure 8.5, page 30
Firing Vehicle Status Designations 8.6, page 30
Close Support of Ground Personnel in Live-Fire Exercises 8.7, page 30
Automated Tower Radio Frequencies 8.8, page 30
References 8.9, page 30
Chapter 9
Mortars, page 31
Firing Conditions 9.1, page 31
Mortar Fire Control System (MFCS) Gunnery 9.2, page 32
Hip-Shoot Fire Missions 9.3, page 32
Surface Danger Zone 9.4, page 32
References 9.5, page 32
Chapter 10
Artillery, page 33
Firing Conditions – General Requirements 10.1, page 33
Firing Artillery Cannon – General Requirements 10.2, page 33
Field Artillery Cannon Surface Danger Zone 10.3, page 34
Non-Established Firing Point Program 10.4, page 34
Direct Fire Safety 10.5, page 35
Paladin and All Towed Howitzers 10.6, page 35
Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) 10.7, page 35
References 10.8, page 36
Chapter 11
Aviation Range Safety, page 37
General Information 11.1, page 37
Firing Conditions 11.2, page 37
Unmanned Aircraft Systems Considerations 11.3, page 38
v
Chapter 12
Air Defense Artillery Weapon System, page 40
General Information 12.1, page 40
Air Defense Radio Controlled Miniature Aerial Target (RCMAT) 12.2, page 40
References 12.3, page 40
Chapter 13
Chemical Agents, Smoke, and Aircraft Spray, page 41
General 13.1, page 41
Riot Control Agents 13.2, page 41
Smoke 13.3, page 42
Smoke Pots 13.4, page 42
Aircraft Spray 13.5, page 42
References 13.6, page 42
Chapter 14
Non-Lethal Weapons, page 43
Definition 14.1, page 43
General 14.2, page 43
References 14.3, page 44
Chapter 15
Mines, Firing Devices, Trip Flares, Simulators, and Explosive Charges, page 45
General 15.1, page 45
Demolitions and Explosives 15.2, page 45
Firing Devices 15.3, page 46
Shaped Charges 15.4, page 47
Bangalore Torpedoes 15.5, page 47
Mine-Clearing Line Charge (MCLIC) 15.6, page 47
Cratering Charges 15.7, page 47
Mines 15.8, page 47
Trip Flares (M48 and M49) 15.9, page 47
Simulators 15.10, page 48
Live Fire Exercise Breach Facility 15.11, page 48
References 15.12, page 49
Chapter 16
Laser Range Safety, page 50
General 16.1, page 50
Precautions for Laser Devices 16.2, page 50
Firing Conditions 16.3, page 50
Force on Force Exercises 16.4, page 51
References 16.5, page 51
Chapter 17
Live Fire Exercises, page 52
Safety During Live-Fire Exercises 17.1, page 52
Information for Commanders 17.2, page 52
Exercise Training 17.3, page 52
Firing Precautions 17.4, page 53
Fire Control 17.5, page 54
Air Support 17.6, page 54
Training Unit’s Responsibilities 17.7, page 55
Range Control’s Responsibilities 17.8, page 55
Changes in LFX/CALFEX Scenarios 17.9, page 55
Infantry Platoon Battle Course (IPBC) 17.10, page 55
Convoy Live Fire Exercise (CLFX) 17.11, page 56
References 17.12, page 56
vi
Chapter 18
Environmental Management, page 57
General 18.1, page 57
Limited Use Areas 18.2, page 57
Restrictions on Firing White Phosphorus 18.3, page 57
Field Water Points 18.4, page 57
Fire Control Procedures 18.5, page 58
Historical Preservation 18.6, page 58
Noise Monitoring 18.7, page 58
Field Fuel Storage/Bladders 18.8, page 59
Mobile POL Distribution Points 18.9, page 59
Mechanical Digging 18.10, page 59
Vegetation 18.11, page 60
Greywater Procedures 18.12, page 60
Appendix, page 61
Range Descriptions Appendix A, page 61
Risk Management Appendix B, page 216
Accident and Incident Reporting Appendix C, page 219
Zulu Mast Map Appendix D, page 224
Improved Landing Areas Map Appendix E, page 226
Drop Zones Appendix F, page 228
Authorized White Light Road Map Appendix G, page 235
Range Control Forms Appendix H, page 247
Weapons Safety Certification Memo, page 238
Range Pre-Operation Checklist, page 239
Camp Ripley Exception to Policy Request, page 240
Camp Ripley Target Matrix, page 241
Request to Camp in the Field Training Area and/or Cantonment, page 242
Explosive Ordnance Incident Report, page 243
Range Control Tables I, page 244
RC Table 1-1 OIC/RSO Requirements, page 245
RC Table Declinations, page 246
RC Table Medical Requirements, page 247
RC Table 2-2 Range Personal Protective Equipment, page 248
RC Table Quick Reference, page 250
vii
Suspense Dates
SUSPENSE
DATES
DESCRIPTION
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
An Initial SIGNED copy of an CRM/ORM MUST be submitted to Range Control
NLT 90 days prior to the training event (i.e. live-fire, simunitions training,
rappelling, water operations, Confidence Course, Field Leader Reaction Course and
aerial operations).
Request use of ranges and training areas
For ALL Un-Established ranges, DEMO ranges, and/or Live-Fire Exercises:
OPLANS; DEMO Plans with Wiring Diagrams; Target Scenarios; Target Matrices;
Deliberate Risk Assessment Worksheet (DD Form 2977)s must be submitted to
Range Control NLT 90 days prior to range usage.
Coordinate use of navigable waterways – OPLAN and Risk Management Worksheet
Requests for targets NLT 90 days in advance
Coordinate use of HE hand grenades
J, K, and MK-19 ranges are approved for 40mm TP rounds only, other firing points
may be requested through Range Control NLT 90 days in advance
NLT 90 days prior, units must schedule the Training Area that their stationary
Firing Point(s) [FP(s)] and/or Hip-Shoot missions will be located in, and the Impact
Area they will be firing into. This will give Range Control the time to draw, verify,
and approve the Surface Danger Zones (SDZs) for the requested Firing Points (FPs).
Information necessary for Range Control to produce SDZ’s for Mortar units – TFT’s
for your weapon system, Mortar size and Ammo to be fired from the firing point.
Units will submit a Hip-Shoot Mission OPLAN and Risk Management Worksheet
NLT 90 days prior to Range Control for review and approval.
The LRAD must be approved through Range Control
Request Breach Facility Doors and Windows with
Unit requests the CLFX NLT 90 days prior to range usage, utilizing ATS Form 23
30 DAYS
30 DAYS
Coordinate use of RIOT Control Agents with Range Control
Coordinate Aerial Disbursement of Chemical Agents with Range Control
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
72 HOURS
72 HOURS
72 HOURS
72 HOURS
72 HOUS
72 HOURS
48 HOURS
48 HOURS
48 HOURS
48 HOURS
48 HOURS
48 HOURS
48 HOURS
48 HOURS
Request range changes/additions with Range Control (need to submit exception to
policy memo if changes are needed within 72 hours)
Request weapon system changes/additions with Range Control (need to submit
exception to policy memo if changes are needed within 72 hours)
Military units are required to utilize SINCGARS as their Primary form of
communication. An Exception to Policy Request must be submitted by the Unit
Commander to Range Control NLT 72 hours prior to range/training area usage.
All means of acquiring SINCGARS capability must be attempted prior to
authorizing the use of Motorola radios.
Request changes to automated range scenarios with automated target systems
Artillery units will coordinate use with affected maneuver units prior to occupation
of firing points. Maneuver and artillery units, prior to AT or IDT periods, will agree
upon terrain utilization. The unit will coordinate with Range Control NLT 72 hours
in advance for the training area and time period, for the execution of the program.
Conduct walk thru of CALFEX or non-standard live-fire exercises with Range
Control
Coordinate Convoy Movements and Road Marches
Submit POV exception to policy request
Submit white light exception to policy request
Coordinate NVD drivers training
Submit unauthorized vehicle downrange exception to policy request
Coordinate blocking of roads and trails
Coordinate for flight and ROZ activation
Request smoke generator and smoke pot use
viii
CHAPTER
REFERENCE
1.4.4
1.7.1
1.7.3
2.6.1,a),1)
2.13.1,b)
5.2.1
5.3.3,a)
9.1.2
9.3.1
14.2.6,g)
15.11.7
17.12.3
13.2.1
13.5
1.7.4
1.7.4
1.15.3
4.7.1,b)
10.4.2
17.8.3
1.14.2,a),4)
1.9.3
1.10.2
1.10.3
1.11.2,a)
1.13.4
2.4.1,d)
13.4.1
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this regulation is to provide guidance for maximum realistic combat readiness training focused on
safe use of available terrain and facilities down range on Camp Ripley, to prevent injury to personnel or damage to
property.
1.1.1 The Camp Ripley Range Regulation is published to establish safe, uniform policies and procedures
applicable to the proper use of range facilities and training areas on this installation.
1.1.2 The provisions of this appendix apply to all personnel, military or civilian, utilizing or occupying any portion
of the field training areas, to include airspace, within the installation boundaries. Personnel utilizing any range
training facility must comply with this publication, and become familiar with AR 385-63 Range Safety, DA
Pamphlet 385-63 Range Safety, AR 385-64 U.S. Army Explosives Safety Program, and DA Pamphlet 385-64
Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards.
1.1.3 NOTE: Any unit, person, organization, agency, or club that willfully violates a policy or procedure
included in this regulation or any of the referenced publications below will be suspended from installation
training and/or punished under the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ) or Minnesota Statutes.
1.1.4 NOTE: The use of digital media for FMs/TMs are AUTHORIZED as long as you have access to keep
your device charged and you are able retrieve the material/media anytime.
1.2 Range Safety Certification Program
Range safety certification programs train, qualify, and prepare personnel assigned duties of Officer-in- Charge
(OIC), and Range Safety Officer (RSO) for firing exercises and maneuver operations. Units can obtain a sample
weapon tests from Range Control, or from the Range Control MN Sharepoint Portal page,
http://ngmnsp2010/CRTC/OPS/Range/default.aspx, or non-MNARNG units can contact Range Control.
1.2.1 Units must integrate Range Safety Certification Programs into their organizational training.
1.2.2 Battalion/Squadron Commanders (O-5 or O-4P) verify Range OIC and RSO certifications by endorsing the
Weapon Safety Certification Memorandum (see Appendix H). Units are responsible for forwarding the signed
memorandum to Range Control for appropriate action. The certification stated on the Weapon Safety Certification
is valid for 1 (one) year.
1.2.3 NOTE: Units not having a Battalion/Squadron Commander must obtain certification from an O-5/O-4
(P) in an O-5 command position or higher, within their chain of command.
1.2.4 The Range Control Officer (RCO) will conduct a range safety briefing for personnel designated as range
OICs and RSOs on the use of the training complex as part of their certification. The range safety briefing is valid
for a period of 90 (ninety) days.
1.2.5 The RCO and his Range Control Staff must monitor the effectiveness of the range safety certification
programs for OICs and RSOs.
1.2.6 The RCO has authority to revoke certification of any OIC or RSO for violating the requirements of AR 38563, DAM 385-63, or this regulation.
1.2.7 Guidelines for Battalion Safety Certification Programs: Battalion Safety Certification Programs will be used
to train and certify personnel in the duties of OIC and RSO for firing exercises and/or maneuver operations. Sample
weapon tests can be obtained from Range Control, or from the Range Control MN SharePoint Portal page,
http://ngmnsp2010/CRTC/OPS/Range/default.aspx, or non-MNARNG units can contact Range Control.
a) Battalion Safety Certification Programs must be integrated into unit gunnery training programs.
b) The BN/SQDN CDR (O-5 or O-4P) will certify the OICs and RSOs utilizing the Weapon Safety Certification
Memorandum (see Appendix H) once all requirements of the Battalion Safety Program are met. This certification is
valid for 1 (one) year. Units must send a copy to Range Control.
c) Personnel designated, as OIC and RSO will receive a range safety briefing from Range Control prior to range
operations. This briefing is valid for a period of ninety days.
1.3 Responsibilities
Commanders of units and activities must comply with guidelines established in AR 385-63, DA Pam 385-63, and
this publication, regarding the functions of appropriate and safe range operation. The following is a list of personnel,
and their responsibilities, for safe operation of the ranges and field training areas.
1
1.3.1 The Installation/Post Commander
Command and operate the training center effectively, safely, and IAW applicable laws and regulations.
a) Organize training center support activities and establish management procedures IAW current regulations.
b) Develop and forward through command channels appropriate requests for deviation from the standardized
organization and functional alignments prescribed by this SOP.
c) Ensure training center staff, civilian and military receive appropriate training. Ensure adequate resources are
provided to guarantee continual effective operation of the training center.
1.3.2 Installation Operations Officer
a) Serves as the unit’s initial POC for all information relating to Camp Ripley.
b) Serves as the POC for all scheduling activities.
c) Represents the Post Commander in all matters pertaining to the control and access of ranges and training
areas.
d) Is the Post Incident Control Officer.
1.3.3 Installation Safety Manager
a) Provide oversight responsibility for all range safety matters
b) Investigate or ensure range accidents are investigated by the appropriate command level.
c) Review all nonstandard range and training activities, to include the user-provided risk management (RM)
documentation for those activities with high or extremely high residual risk.
d) Review and make recommendations regarding the conduct of overhead fire.
e) Investigate and report ammunition and explosives accidents, IAW DoD 6055/9-STD, DA Pam 385-64 and AR
385-10.
f) Coordinate AE safety program requirements with unit Commanders.
1.3.4 Installation Range Control Officer
a) Serves as the central point for control and coordination of all activities conducted within the installation
training complex to ensure safety and unified operations.
b) Withdraws or suspends installation training complex privileges from any person, organization, agency, or club
that willfully violates regulations and/or procedures listed in AR 385-63, DA Pamphlet 385-63 or this regulation; or
from any person whose ability or conduct is incompatible with the safe use of government range structures and
facilities.
c) Responsible for providing safe training environments by employing all control measures and identifying all
aerial and surface danger zones.
d) Publishes a Range Bulletin for Camp Ripley at least 24 hours prior to any scheduled firing. The Range
Bulletin is available at Range Control, Bldg. 24-199, and at the Camp Ripley Operations Office, Bldg. 11-1. The
Range Bulletins are also available for MNARNG units ONLY in the CRTC Range Control SharePoint site at:
http://ngmnsp2010/CRTC/OPS/Range/default.aspx. It will include the following items:
1) Where firing is going to be conducted.
2) The scheduled time firing begins and ends each day.
3) The boundaries of Weapon Surface Danger Zones (SDZ), Aerial Weapon and Air Drop Danger Zones
(ADZ), and UAS/SUAS Restricted Operations Zones (ROZ).
4) Range Maps
5) Overlays
6) Firing Data
7) Opening and closing of field training areas, and bivouac sites.
8) SDZ, ADZ, and ROZ information for the current day, plus 72 hours following.
9) Monitors the following SINCGARS radio frequencies reserved exclusively for CRTC RC:
Primary Frequency is 36.100 (Single Channel Plain Text)
Alternate Frequency is 36.900 (Single Channel Plain Text)
10) The RCO monitors the effectiveness of safety programs for OICs and RSOs.
1.3.5 Liaison Officer (during AT Periods only)
a) Using units must appoint a Liaison Officer (normally the S-3) to coordinate with Range Control and other
training units.
b) Serves as unit POC for all activities in the field training area.
c) The Liaison Officer represents the using units in all matters pertaining to range firing and training area usage.
d) The Liaison Officer must understand the responsibilities of, and work closely with, the Training Area
Coordinator (TAC).
e) Attend the Range Control Annual Training Daily Coordination Meeting (held at 0800) to discuss resources
and scheduled training. The Liaison Officer must be prepared to discuss scheduled training up to four days in
advance.
2
1.3.6 Training Area Coordinator (TAC)
a) The individual designated by the RCO for the opening and closing of training areas/bivouac sites, and other
assigned duties.
b) Clears training areas and bivouac sites with the Liaison Officer, or other appointed personnel.
c) Maintains a list of training areas and bivouac sites being used by organizations in the field.
d) Maintains a list of restricted areas.
e) Keeps activity and training area maps current at the Range Control Office.
1.3.7 Battalion/Squadron Commanders
a) Comply with the installation procedures for the certification of unit OICs, RSOs, and Laser Range Safety
Officers (LRSOs).
b) Commanders of field artillery, mortar, and MLRS battalions or indirect fire must establish and maintain safety
training and certification program to train and qualify personnel in safety procedures for their specific areas of
responsibility. Only personnel complete annual certification with training are not authorized to serve as OIC or RSO
for ANY live fire ranges (see Table 1-1 Appendix I). Officers who have not completed their branch qualification
course will not be able to OIC or RSO ANY live fire ranges (see Table 1-1 Appendix I)
d) Conduct risk management for all range operations.
1.3.8 Unit Commanders
a) Ensures compliance with DA Pamphlet 385-63, this Regulation, and any applicable TMs, FMs, FMFMs
(Marine Corps), TCs, and SOPs for safe training and firing for each weapon system within the command.
b) Ensures that all personnel within the command are briefed on and comply with the installation range
procedures and safety requirements, including the use of required personal protective equipment.
c) Designates an OIC and RSO for each firing and/or maneuver exercise in accordance with OIC and RSO Table
1-1 Appendix I.
d) Ensures certification of personnel performing the duties of OIC and RSO IAW the established installation
safety certification program.
e) Complies with the range safety certification program guidance for OICs and RSOs, to ensure that they are:
1) Competent and properly instructed in the performance of their duties.
2) Knowledgeable in the weapon systems for which they are held responsible and in safe ammunition handling
and use procedures.
3) Develops a SOP for laser operations, to include a provision for immediate medical attention for personnel
who incur eye or other overexposure to laser energy, and reporting laser overexposure incidents IAW DA Pam 38540, TB MED 524, MIL-HDBK 828A, and MCO 5104.1.
4) Applies risk management, and develops controls and procedures for all phases of training events.
1.3.9 Range Officer-in-Charge (OIC): Range OIC must meet grade/rank requirements of Table 1-1 Appendix I
and must be Weapon Safety Certified IAW paragraph 1.2.1 before commencing operations, training or firing.
a) Must attend a Range Safety Briefing at the Range Control Office prior to scheduled use of a range. The
briefing is valid for a period of 90 days.
b) Confirms that the range/training area is properly scheduled and verify that the particular firing to be conducted
is permitted on the range or in the training area scheduled for use.
c) The only person authorized to open and close the range with Range Control. MUST be on the range at all
times while the range is in an “Open” status.
d) Ensures that required communications are established and maintained.
e) Will not be assigned any additional duties while the range is open.
f) Ensures the overall safe conduct of training and proper use of the range. The ultimate responsibility for safety
rests with the OIC.
g) Ensures that the RSO is physically present on the range at all times.
h) Determines when it is safe to fire in accordance with (IAW) applicable regulations and installation range
requirements.
i) Ensures proper supervision of personnel performing misfire, hang-fire, and cook-off procedures.
j) Ensures safe laser operation
k) Ensures that adequate medical support is available and they are properly equipped.
l) Ensures that ammunition and explosives are properly handled, transported, stored, and accounted for within
the training complex from the time of receipt to the time of expenditure or turn-in.
m) Ensures plans for firing exercises and maneuvers are coordinated with Range Control.
n) Ensures control of the target areas to prohibit entry by unauthorized personnel.
o) Ensures all ammunition malfunctions and accidents are reported to Range Control IAW AR 75-1 and DA Pam
385-40.
p) Ensures that Range Control has authorized the entrance of any civilian personnel into the training complex.
3
q) Ensuring that medical support and range personnel are familiar with air and ground medical evacuation
procedures in accordance with this regulation.
r) Briefs the RSO on the duties to be performed in support of the training event. Clearly establish the
requirement for the RSO to brief the OIC on the safety of the range and the unit, and the readiness to commence
live-fire operations prior to the start of firing.
s) Implements risk management in all phases of the training event.
t) Posts the Range Bulletin in a prominent place that is accessible to all Soldiers.
u) Upon completion of training exercises the OIC/Principle instructor or designated representative will:
1) Ensure that all weapons are cleared of ammunition prior to removal from the firing line or problem area.
Units must conduct a mandatory shakedown inspection after all live fire ranges or live fire exercises.
2) Inspect the area and ensure that all explosive charges, booby trap materials, simulators and pyrotechnics
emplaced but not used are removed and turned in to the Ammunition Supply Point (ASP). Explosives that cannot be
removed will be detonated in place by Explosive Ordnance Demolition (EOD) personnel. The OIC or designated
representative must remain on site until given approval by Range Control that they are clear and approve to leave the
site.
3) Ensure compliance with Range Control’s Training and Range Area Clearance Procedures. (See 1.14
Clearance of Training Areas)
4) Return unexpended ammunition, explosives, simulators, and misfired ammunition to the ASP. Do not
discard misfired ammunition down range for any reason. This creates a hazard (cook offs) to personnel in a fire
situation.
1.3.10 Range Safety Officer (RSO): Range Safety Officers must meet grade/rank requirements of Table 1-1
Appendix I and must be Weapon Safety Certified IAW paragraph 1.2.1 before commencing operations, training or
firing. The RSO must be physically present on the range prior to and during any firing. The RSO represents the
OIC and is responsible for complying with appropriate safety publications, range regulations and adherence to these
directives by all personnel participating in the conduct of range activities. The RSO must not be assigned additional
duties, which hinder the accomplishment of his/her primary duty. In general, the RSO’s responsibilities include, but
are not limited to:
a) Must attend a Range Safety Briefing at the Range Control Office prior to scheduled use of a range. The
briefing is valid for a period of 90 days.
b) Must be knowledgeable in all the publications pertaining to the safety procedures for the range, weapons and
ammunition to be used.
c) Ensures the proper positioning of weapons and personnel.
d) Briefs all personnel on the left and right limits for the range being fired and that troops remain within the
range boundaries. Brief all personnel to command “CEASE FIRE” if any unsafe situation occurs.
e) Ensures that only authorized ammunition and explosives, to include proper charge, fuze, and fuze settings are
utilized.
f) Ensures firing settings and weapons systems are within prescribed safety limits and are verified.
g) Verifies that all required roadblocks, barriers or guards are in position and that the danger area is clear of
personnel and equipment prior to firing.
h) Ensure that Soldiers wear proper hearing and eye protection within the prescribed noise and eye hazard areas.
i) Conducts final coordination with the OIC prior to commencing live-fire operations. This coordination
includes summary of checks, inspections, and actions that the RSO has completed, and verifies that the required
communications are established.
j) Orders an immediate cease-fire when any unsafe condition occurs.
k) Reports all accidents, weapon malfunctions, and ammunition malfunctions to the range OIC.
l) Verifies, upon completion of firing or firing order, to the OIC that all weapons and weapon systems are clear
and safe before allowing the removal of weapons from the firing area.
m) Properly briefs Assistant Range Safety Officers ARSO(s) (Line Safeties) on their duties. ARSO’s duties does
not relieve the RSO/OIC of their responsibilities.
1.3.11 Assistant Range Safety Officer(s) (ARSO) (Line Safeties): It is suggested that units plan to have one (1)
ARSO (Line Safety) for every two (2) firing lanes to maximize range operations efficiency. One ARSO (Line
Safety) should not cover more than (4) firing lanes..
a) Assist the RSO as directed by the OIC and/or RSO. Primary duty is to ensure that weapons are clear and on
“Safe” when Firers enter and exit the Firing Line.
b) Are not required to be Weapon Safety Certified, or to attend the Range Control Safety Briefing.
c) Must be knowledgeable on correct weapon misfire and malfunction procedures.
1.3.12 Medical Personnel: All military medical support personnel should be familiar with pertinent medical
training and range SOPs.
4
a) The senior medical person from the organization are required to attend the Range Control Safety briefing but
it is not required.
b) All medical personnel will be familiar with paragraph 1.16 in the CRTC range regulation.
1.4 Risk Management - Safety:
The purpose of this section is to enhance safety measures to prevent injury to personnel, damage to equipment and
property. The guidance provided here does not replace safety regulations or specific unit safety SOPs.
1.4.1 Units must obtain the Range Bulletin for all off-limit areas or training sites to minimize impact on training
and reduce dangers to personnel downrange.
1.4.2 Impact Area and Unexploded Ordinance (UXO) Hazards – off limits to all personnel. Should you
experience unexploded ordinance or duds DO NOT TOUCH! Notify Range Control, mark the UXO surrounding
area and wait at a safe distance away until Range Control personnel arrive on the scene..
1.4.3 Risk management is a unit leadership responsibility (ATP 5-19). Range Control personnel serve as an
excellent resource to help identify trends and potential hazards.
1.4.4 An Initial SIGNED copy of an Risk Management Worksheet/Operational Risk Assessment
Worksheet(ORM) MUST be submitted to Range Control NLT 90 days prior to the training event (i.e. live-fire,
simunitions training, rappelling, water operations, Confidence Course, Field Leader Reaction Course and aerial
operations).
a) Civilian agencies conducting training downrange will utilize the Deliberate Risk Management Worksheet DD
Form 2977.
b) A sample form of the Deliberate Risk Management Worksheet (DD Form 2977) is provided in Appendix B;
also refer to ATP 5-19, and GRAT https://safety.army.mil.
c) MEDEVAC Procedure – See para 1.6
d) Units must turn in risk assessments to Range Control prior to the conduct of the following training events:
Live Fire Ranges/Exercises, Water Operations of any kind, Rappel Tower, Confidence Course, Field Leader
Reaction Course.
1.5 Accident/Incident Reporting
All accidents/incidents will be reported in accordance with procedures outlined in DA Pam 385-40 Accident
Reporting and Records.
1.5.1 All accidents/incidents on any Camp Ripley range, or in the field training area, must be reported to Range
Control immediately by SINCGARS radio (36.100 primary, 36.900 alternate), Motorola radio, or by telephone 320616-3137/6026, utilizing the Range Accident/Incident Checklist (see Appendix C) as a guide.
1.5.2 Reports malfunctions involving weapons, ammunition, and/or explosives in accordance with AR 75-1.
1.6 Medical Requirements
1.6.1 Medical Support:
a) Units/Civilian Agencies are responsible and required to have a Combat Lifesaver (CLS) for military or First
Responder for civilian, litter, litter capable carrying vehicle, and aid bag for all live fire and non-live exercises.
Some ranges may require a Certified Medic, EMT; review the Medical Support Requirements Table in Appendix I.
1) To utilize one medical support personnel for more than one range a exception to policy must be submitted to
range control.
b) All ranges WILL be placed in a cease-fire status if medical personnel (CLS/First Responder/EMT/Medic)
leave the range for any reason. The Range remains in a check fire status until the medical personnel return.
c) It is the responsibility of the patients’ parent agency/unit to transport non-emergency patients from the range
to the TMC or off post medical facility during training.
1.6.2 All MEDEVAC requests will be coordinated through Range Control.
1.6.3 Refer to Appendix I Range Control Tables for medical support requirements.
1.6.4 NOTE: DO NOT CALL 911, CALL RANGE CONTROL
1.7 Requesting Ranges and Training Areas
CRTC utilizes the Range Facility Management Support System (RFMSS) to schedule all Installation facilities and
ranges.
1.7.1 Inactive Duty Training (IDT)
a) Units are authorized to submit their request for installation facilities and ranges three years out in RFMSS or
by submitting an ATS Form 23 to the Operations Office.
b) Operations then reviews and confirms dates, and/or notifies the unit of any conflicts NLT 12 months out from
date of scheduled training.
5
c) Units are responsible for updating their RFMSS requests one year out, six months out and NLT 90 days prior
to requested date.
d) In the event of a range or facility conflict, the requesting battalion headquarters will be asked to coordinate
with the other unit to develop a workable solution. If a solution cannot be reached, the issue will be deferred to the
respective Brigade Headquarters for resolution.
1.7.2 Annual Training (AT)
a) The BN Training Officer or designated representative sends Annual Training requests to the Operations
Office.
b) CRTC Operations Officers confirm receipt of the request, notifies the units of any conflicts with the request.
c) Annual Training conflict resolutions will be made during the annual Camp Ripley AT Conference, by the
Operations RFMSS Scheduler based on feedback from the Battalions, Brigades and Division headquarters as
reservations are being entered into RFMSS. Units are required to send a representative while at Annual Training to
the daily (0800) Range Control Annual Training Coordination Meeting to de-conflict any changes to their training
plan.
1.7.3 OPLANS; DEMO Plans with Wiring Diagrams; Target Scenarios; Target Matrices; Deliberate Risk
Assessment Worksheet (DD Form 2977)s must be submitted to Range Control NLT 90 days prior to range usage
for ALL Un-Established ranges, DEMO ranges, and/or Live-Fire Exercises.
1.7.4 NOTE: Units must submit n Exception to Policy Memorandum to Range Control by the BN S-3 for
changes to FIRING Ranges and/or weapons Systems within 72 hours of range utilization.
1.7.5 NOTE: Alcoholic beverages are NOT permitted in the Field Training Area at any time, unless an
Exception to Policy has been approved by the Range Control Officer, for the consumption of alcohol at the
defined Rest Areas, for morale and welfare purposes only.
1.7.6 NOTE: Range Control personnel are authorized immediate access to all unit locations, training areas,
and ranges without interference from using units. Consumption of alcohol may be approved at defined Rest
Areas, for morale and welfare purposes only.
1.7.7 Units must ensure that they have the proper number and type of medical support personnel available to
support their requested ranges. See Appendix I for the Range Specific Medical Support Requirements Table.
1.7.8 All Military Units and Civilian Lessees WILL order Portable Toilets from the Supply and Services
Warehouse at (320) 632-3128 for all activities scheduled in the field training area, except for those ranges that have
a classroom with latrine facilities in them.
1.7.9 NOTE: All activities for use as an assembly area or bivouac site in the Field Training Area are
considered un-authorized without an approved usage request (RFMSS Reservation) from Post Operations
and/or Range Control.
1.8 Access to the Ranges and Field Training Areas
1.8.1 Field Training Area Access Gates are located at the following locations:
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
L
M
Chickamauga Road and Armor Trail
Range Control (NOT for use by tracked vehicles)
Ft. Ripley Road north of North Motor Pool Road
Normandy Road at County Road 1
Enniskillen Road at County Road 1
Yalu Road at Installation Boundary
Arno Road at County Road 1
Ft Ripley Road and Armor Trail
Old Gravel Pit access at County Road 1
UM 9395105457
UM 9542006908
UM 9417206306
UM 8450613526
UM 8609121578
UM 8812731293
UM 8639325168
UM 9391305805
UM 8633123695
1.8.2 Keys required for all Gates listed above MUST be hand receipted from Range Control. There is a $150.00
replacement cost for each key that is lost.
1.8.3 Military Wheeled Vehicles main access down range is through E Gate at Range Control.
1.8.4 Military Tracked Vehicles
a) Will enter and exit the Field Training Area through gates D, F, or L only.
6
b) NOTE: Tracked vehicles will not operate in any recreational areas, or in the designated Winter
Training Areas.
1.9 Speed Limit Enforcement
1.9.1 Field Training Area:
a) Daylight hours: 25 MPH MAXIMUM on all roads.
b) Nighttime hours:
1) MSRs ONLY: 25 MPH MAXIMUM, with white lights
2) All other roads and trails: 15 MPH MAXIMUM, with Blackout Drive
1.9.2 NOTE: When passing troops or anyone on the side of the road, SLOW DOWN to 15 MPH.
1.9.3 An Exception of Policy must be submitted to Range Control with approval from the Installation Post
Commander 48 hours in advance for any deviation in down range speed limit.
1.10 White Light Usage Policy
Range Control reserves the right to make daily changes to this policy, to accommodate changes to specific unit
training requests.
1.10.1 MSRs: White light usage is authorized at night. This includes the direct route (Champagne Road, South
Gettysburg Road, and Argonne Road) between Range Control and the A-Complex ranges. (See Appendix G for
Authorized White Light Road Map).
1.10.2 All other roads and trails: White light usage is prohibited from use in the Field Training Area during periods
of darkness, with the exception of emergency vehicles involved in emergency situations. Submit an Exception to
Policy Request (see Appendix H) to Range Control NLT 48 hours prior, to request an exception to this policy from
the Range Control Office.
1.10.3 Units must coordinate Night Vision Device (NVD) drivers training through Range Control NLT 48 hours
prior. The unit must have a certified and licensed instructor, per AR 600-55.
1.11 Vehicle Passes
1.11.1 Authorized Vehicles Downrange: Military Tactical Vehicles, Military red GSA supply trucks, blue bird
buses, and marked government vehicles do not require a range pass.
a) All privately owned vehicles (POV), GSA with exception to above, 1.11.1, non-tactical vehicles and
contractor vehicles need a range pass prior to going down range.
1) Display your range pass on the dash at all times while downrange
2) All POV and contractor traffic must clear the field training area prior to the hours of darkness.
3) Ensure you hold up your range pass when entering the Range Control gate
4) Woodcutters, anglers, and overnight campers must obtain a Vehicle Pass (one for each vehicle) from the
Range Control Office. Overnight campers will be issued a key for E Gate, when the Range Control Office will not
be staffed overnight, for emergency use.
5) NOTE: During the Winter months (October to April) ALL PERSONNEL, with exception to military
units conducting scheduled training down range, will stop in at Range Control to inform them about the
purpose of the mission, route of travel, and destination of the vehicle(s) going down range.
1.11.2 Unauthorized Vehicles Downrange: Snowmobiles and ATV’s are not authorized to go downrange without
prior approval and a completed exception to policy signed and approved.
a) The Range Control OIC may grant exceptions to this policy. The Exception to Policy Request must be
submitted NLT 48 hours prior.
b) Exception is granted for maintenance use by the Department of Public works at Training Site and use by
Department of Natural Resources Conservation Officers. Written requests for exception will be forwarded through
the Camp Ripley Environmental Office to the Range Officer for activities in the Field Training Area and the
Director of Public Safety in the Cantonment Area.
1.12 Fishing
Fishing is permitted on authorized lakes and the rivers during DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY. See the CRTC
Regulation Fishing Policy for details. Persons may not enter the field training area prior to sunrise and must return
to the Cantonment Area prior to sunset. Due to military training requiring blackout drive, headlights are not
authorized in the Field Training Area during the hours of darkness.
7
1.12.1 Ice fishing is permitted on authorized lakes, during DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY. Range Control and/or
CRTC Environmental Staff measures ice depth and follows the MN DNR Minimum Ice Depth Guidelines before
authorizing personnel to be on the Installation Lakes. While icehouses are permissible, they must be removed each
day. No vehicles are authorized to be on the ice of any lake within the Field Training Area (No Driving on the ICE).
1.13 Use of field Training Areas
1.13.1 The OIC/POC of the training area is required to attend a Range Control Safety Briefing (You can be the
OIC/POC for more than one Training Area). A RSO is also required to attend a Range Control Safety Briefing
when using blanks, simunitions, less-lethal, and pyro in the training area.
1.13.2 The OIC/POC of the TA must send Training Area Opening/Closing data utilizing RC Form 18 (TRAINING
AREA OPENING/CLOSING CHECKLIST).
1.13.3 The Camp Ripley Environmental Section will close some Training Areas or bivouac sites to allow for area
rejuvenation. Units are not authorized to occupy a closed area. Closed training areas will be clearly marked.
1.13.4 Immediately report existing maneuver damage or litter to Range Control upon entering a training area.
Failure to do so will result in the occupying unit being held responsible for the damage and litter.
1.13.4 Coordinate the blocking and unblocking of any roads or trails with the Training Area Coordinator (TAC) or
Range Control NLT 48 hours prior to establishing the roadblock.
1.13.5 Military/Civilian Agencies utilizing Training Areas require Primary and Secondary Communications.
1.14 Clearance of Field Training Areas
1.14.1 Range Control personnel will inspect all training areas and bivouac sites before the using unit may clear the
post. Ensure the following is accomplished:
a) OIC, RSO, and sufficient personnel must be present during range clearance.
b) The using unit is responsible for policing the range area, range boundary to range boundary. Remove all
garbage, trash, and other debris from the field, and dispose of it at the Transfer Station located near Range Control.
c) All buildings pertaining to the range or training area will be checked and must be thoroughly cleaned and
inventoried.
b) Fill in all fighting positions and restore the area to its original appearance.
1) NOTE: Do not use logs or trash as filler material when filling any fighting position.
e) Latrines must be checked for cleanliness. Latrines must be swept out, mopped, and paper products replaced.
1) NOTE: It is prohibited to leave human waste on the surface of the ground.
f) Remove all forms of wire from training areas before clearing.
g) Remove and disassemble position barriers in the training area. Open all roads and trails before clearing.
h) Some ranges have hand receipts posted to the ammo shed, classroom or in the tower and will be inventoried
by RC personnel during the clearance procedures.
i) Range Control will inspect the range. Any missing items or damage to the range will be the responsibility of
the OIC of the range.
1.15.6 Prior to departing field training area(s): The Point of Contact (POC) for the training area will coordinate
with the Training Area Coordinator (TAC) to clear and close the field training areas. The TAC can designate RC
personnel to clear an area.
1.14.7 NOTE: USING UNITS MUST CONTACT RANGE CONTROL FOR SPECIFIC INDIVIDUAL
RANGE REQUIREMENTS FOR TARGET REPLACEMENT.
1.15 Convoy/Road Marches
1.15.1 Convoys or road marches must meet the following requirements:
a) Must have a route overlay submitted for approval by Range Control 24 hours in advance
b) POC information must be submitted w/overlay to range control
c) Medical support while conducting operations (see Appendix I Medical Support Requirements)
d) The POC is responsible for police of rest or training areas.
e) The convoy commander will have communication with all vehicles in the convoy
d) The convoy commander will stop and grab a range bulletin prior to movement downrange
c) When the roads are dusty and there is limited visibility while in a convoy the maximum speed for the convoy
is restricted to 15 mph.
1.15.2 Convoys:
8
a) Commanders may submit an Exception to Policy Request to increase the speed limit for convoy driver
training with Deliberate Risk Assessment Worksheet, and a Route Strip Map to the Post Commander.
1) The Exception to Policy is for DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY. Exception to Policy must be submitted 48
hours in advance with approval from the Installation Post Commander.
2) The map on Appendix G depicts the Main Supply Routes (MSRs) that will support a 35 MPH maximum
speed during daylight hours.
3) A route overlay is not required for submission to Range Control for approval if occupying a training area or
range for training.
1.15.2 Road Marches:
a) Units desiring to enter or exit a gate for road march purposes must coordinate with Range Control for the gate
they desire to use. Personnel on road marches must not climb fences to enter or exit the restricted areas.
b) Units conducting foot road marches downrange during darkness will place traffic guards with flashlights on
similar lighting devices and reflective vest (or cross straps and sleevelets) approximately 100 meters to the front and
rear of the column. The guards must be instructed to wave lights to attract the attention of approaching traffic.
1.16 Communications
Range Control operates the following means of communications:
1.16.1 Primary:
a) SINCGARS: Primary-36.100
b) SINCGARS: Secondary-36.900
c) Motorola Handheld-Channel 1
d) 800 MHZ Law Enforcement
1.16.2 Secondary:
a) Commercial phone: 320-616-3137/3134 or 320-412-6075
1.16.3 NOTE: Military units are required to utilize SINCGARS as their Primary form of communication.
An Exception to Policy Request must be submitted by the Unit Commander to Range Control NLT 72 hours
prior to range/training area usage. All means of acquiring SINCGARS capability must be attempted prior to
authorizing the use of Motorola radios.
1.16.4 Additional Information:
a) All ranges must have two operating means of communication with Range Control at all times.
b) Personal cell phones can only be used as a secondary form of communication, due to cell phone tower
locations being outside the installation boundaries and dead space within the installation.
c) Cell phones must be turned on at all times. A telephone call must be made to Range Control prior to down
range movement to receive authorization for use as a secondary form of communication. Another telephone call to
Range Control will be performed after arrival on the range.
d) Communications with Range Control will be made in the clear. Do not use unit SOI call signs.
e) SINCGARS and Motorola radios are to be used for radio traffic to and from Range Control only. They are not
to be used for administrative purposes, except for emergency notification situations.
1.16.5 Live Fire Range Communication
a) Contact Range Control via the unit’s primary form of communication, upon occupation of, and departure
from, the ranges.
b) Request permission from Range Control to open, close, or change the firing status of the range on the primary
form of communication only.
c) Continuously monitor the primary form of communication.
d) Perform hourly communication checks (every hour, on the hour) while the range is “Open”.
e) Immediately cease-fire if communications with Range Control is lost.
1.16.6 Non-firing Range Communication
a) Request permission from Range Control to open and close the range on a primary form of communication
only.
b) Continuously monitor the primary form of communication while the range is “Open”, to be aware of adverse
weather conditions and for medical emergencies.
1.17 Observation Points (OPs)
1.17.1 OPs are required to “OPEN” first prior to the firing position going into an open status and will open
separately from the firing position.
1.17.2 OPs are required to open their location with Range Control on SINCGARS primary frequency 36.100,
alternate frequency 36.900.
9
1.17.3 Mortar and Artillery OP’s
a) A red flag (and blinking red light at night) must be displayed.
b) Hourly (on the hour) communication checks must be performed while fire missions are being conducted. The
OP will revert to a Non-Live Fire range status, and will only be required to monitor the radio when fire missions are
completed.
c) All Forward Observers (FO) (Mortar/Artillery) will have a safety fan for the unit they are supporting, drawn
on an overlay or a map, to determine/verify that all rounds are landing within safety limits.
d) FOs must establish communications with Range Control prior to the firing position being allowed to open.
e) A Range OIC and RSO will be present for Laser Call-For-Fire missions.
f) Any projectile that bursts or lands outside safety limits, or any unobserved rounds, will require immediate
action and investigation, as outlined below to determine the cause.
1) Immediately, report the incident to Range Control using the Range Incident Checklist (see Appendix C).
2) Immediately, suspend firing of all FA units until the responsible unit is identified.
3) Continuous communication must be maintained with Range Control on SINCGARS primary frequency
36.100, or alternate frequency 36.900.
1.17.4 The following OPs are available on Camp Ripley:
OP1
OP16
UM 91011463
UM 90162469
OP2
OP19
UM 91941565
UM 91622771
OP15
OP23
UM 91352280
UM 92852379
1.17.5 Refer to Chapter 16 for laser usage on an OP.
1.18 OE 254 Antennas
Thirteen radio antenna masts with OE 254 antenna heads are permanently erected at various locations throughout
the installation to extend radio communications capabilities. Report any operating deficiencies to Range Control
immediately. See below for list of Antenna Mast locations (see Appendix D for location map).
Antenna Mast Locations
MAST
LOCATION
NUMBER
Range Control
Z-1
A-Complex
Z-2
Training Area 61
Z-3
Y-4 TTB
Z-4
Training Area 71
Z-5
Training Area 69
Z-6
OP 16
Z-7
COORDINATES
UM95370686
UM91990868
UM95082437
UM95162684
UM88122886
UM86802508
UM90142468
MAST
NUMBER
Z-8
Z-9
Z-10
Z-11
Z-12
Z-13
LOCATION
COORDINATES
OP 15
Training Area 54
Training Area 40
OP 1
Range Control
CLFX AA (TA58)
UM91332287
UM87102204
UM85381612
UM91001464
UM95370686
UM92912305
1.19 Severe Weather
Range Control will disseminate all severe weather watches and warnings on all communication forms. The unit
commander decides when to institute protective measures during inclement weather. Range Control personnel will
open all unoccupied downrange classrooms to provide shelter. Range Control and/or the Automated Tower
Operators have the authority to stop all firing in the event on an electrical storm.
1.20 Maps
1.19.1 Refer to the following websites to order the Camp Ripley Special (NSN 7643-01-451-0524)
https://www.dscr.dla.mil/rmf/accounts/1832.htm or https://www.daas.dla.mil/daashome/daasc_home.asp.
1.19.2 Units may request customized maps for any Camp Ripley ranges or training areas by calling RC at 320616-3137, or by e-mailing the request to: ng.mn.mnarng.list.crc-range-control@mail.mil.
10
Chapter 2
Ranges
2.1 Restricting Access to Impact Areas
2.1.1 Unauthorized persons are prohibited from entering the installation-training complex. The installation RCO is
the approval authority for entry onto the ranges and maneuver areas, and into any impact area.
2.1.2 Unauthorized persons are prohibited from entering impact areas and other areas known, or suspected, to
contain UXO by use of positive controls, to include fencing and UXO hazard warning signs.
2.1.3 Personnel who must enter into an impact area will be thoroughly briefed on the hazards of unexploded
ordnance, and accompanied by Range Control personnel.
2.1.4 Personnel access to impact areas will be limited to qualified EOD personnel, Range Control Staff, and range
maintenance personnel designated by the Range Control Officer.
2.1.5 Unauthorized personnel are prohibited from handling UXO and munitions, or removing them from the
training complex. Procedures (for example, amnesty boxes) will be established for turn-in of ammunition and
explosives items by unauthorized personnel.
2.1.6 All approaches to ranges and impact areas will be guarded by range guards that are properly instructed in
their duties, or closed off by appropriate barriers, as determined by the Range Control Officer. When barriers are
used, appropriate signage will be posted on them.
2.2 Warning Signs, Barriers, Markers, and Flags
2.2.1 Barriers are erected to protect personnel from accessing danger areas. Barriers will be used to block roads,
trails, and other possible access points into danger areas. They will remain in place when firing is in progress.
Commanders must take prompt disciplinary action against personnel who breech barriers.
2.2.2 Units must display daily Range Bulletin in prominent locations for the benefit of all personnel. These
bulletins depict all off-limits areas.
2.2.3 Barrier and Impact Area violations require the following corrective actions:
a) Immediate cease-fire of affected training areas, ranges, and firing points.
b) Range Control personnel will physically check affected area, and detain any violators until a written statement
is obtained, describing the incident.
c) The Unit Commander will be notified, and must submit a written Incident Report (Appendix C) to the Post
Commander, through the Operations Officer. The RCO is authorized to establish additional perimeter or interior
guard posts at any time.
d) The RCO will lift the cease-fire upon receipt of the Incident Reports. The violating unit's commander must
provide a written statement that all personnel are clear of the off-limits areas.
e) MN Statute 609.396. UNAUTHORIZED PRESENCE AT CAMP RIPLEY.
1) Subdivision 1.Misdemeanor: A person is guilty of a misdemeanor if the person intentionally and without
authorization of the adjutant general enters or is present on the Camp Ripley Military Reservation.
2) Subdivision 2.Felony: A person is guilty of a felony and may be sentenced to not more than five years
imprisonment or to payment of a fine of not more than $10,000, or both, if:
(a) the person intentionally enters or is present in an area at the Camp Ripley Military Reservation that is
posted by order of the adjutant general as restricted for weapon firing or other hazardous military activity; and
(b) the person knows that doing so creates a risk of death, bodily harm, or serious property damage.
2.2.4 The RSO posts interior range guards (as required) at specified ranges/firing points, or at the direction of the
RCO.
2.2.5 A red range flag must be displayed from a prominent point at each range, firing point, and observation post
during firing. No firing takes place unless a red range flag is displayed. All firing must cease prior to lowering the
flag.
2.2.6 Red blinking lights must be displayed in addition to the red range flag during the hours of darkness. Battery
operated lanterns are available at Range Control.
2.3 Range Use By Non-Military/Civilian Agencies
2.3.1 Civilian agencies are authorized to use ranges and training areas.
a) Procedures for requesting use are outlined in the CRTC Post Regulation, available through the Camp Ripley
Operations Office, located in Bldg. 11-1. Telephone number is (320) 616-2708. All leasing costs and requirements
are available in the same document.
b) Civilian agency, or supervisor in charge of training, must appoint in writing an OIC and a RSO for each range
requested. This appointment must specify that the individual is safety certified for the specific weapon(s) to be used
(see Appendix H for a sample Safety Certification Memorandum).
11
c) The Completion of a National Rifle Association Instructor Course or equivalent is approved for any individual
performing the duty of OIC and RSO on small arms ranges if a civilian agency has no certifying official.
d) The following are equivalent course model programs that are approved by Range Control:
1) DNR Firearms Instructor Courses
2) State of MN Firearms Instructor Courses
3) Police Officer Firearms Instructor Courses
e) All other equivalent course certification(s) (excluding above-mentioned courses) must be submitted to Range
Control in advance of range use, for review and approval. Equivalent Course POI’s should have covered at a
minimum the following:
1) Range Operations & Organization
2) Range Communications
3) Medical Support and Equipment
4) Weapon misfire procedures
2.3.2 The Operations Officer must approve all civilian access to the field training area.
a) Civilian personnel, such as military family members, and the local populace, must receive authorization from
the Operations Officer to enter the field training area to participate in, or observe capability exercises, firepower
demonstrations, training courses, competitions, or other types of exercises. Such personnel must remain in
designated safe areas as determined by the RCO.
b) Inspection Team members or other official observers required to be on the firing line, firing position, or firing
area, as an exception to policy, will position themselves in safe areas, as determined by the RCO.
c) Civilians, to include family members and DOD civilians, must have approval from the installation RCO to fire
weapons within the installation-training complex, per DA Pamphlet 385-63.
2.4 Coordinating Use of Special Use Airspace
2.4.1 UAS/SUAS Procedures:
a) Range Control has created six (6) “Established” Restricted Operation Zones (ROZ). However, to meet the
unit Commander’s intent, the SUAS can be flown anywhere down range. All SUAS units will request Launch
Points (LP) through the Operations Office by direct input into RFMSS, or by submitting an ATS Form 23. Once
approved by the RFMSS Scheduler, Range Control will create a ROZ for the Launch Point. SUAS will only operate
inside their assigned ROZ.
b) SUAS Mission Qualified Operator (MQ) must be listed as such in the unit’s Weapon Safety Certification
Memorandum to Range Control. This certification is valid for one year. There is no Range Control minimum rank
requirement, as Company Commanders’ appoint MCs, per TC 1-611.
c) Mission Qualified Operator must attend a Range Safety Briefing and sign a Range Safety Briefing Agreement
prior to flight operations. The Agreement is valid for 90 days.
d) Conduct coordination for flight and ROZ activation through Range Control, with a minimum notice of 48
hours prior to event.
e) Range Control treats the ROZ the same as a live-fire range for LP Opening/Closing procedures only. The
Mission Commander Opens/Closes the LP/ROZ with Range Control. Range Control relays pertinent information to
Miller Tower/Operations.
f) There are three instances in which SUAS units operating within a ROZ must contact Miller Tower/Operations
directly:
1) Upon initial occupation of the ROZ before the first flight
2) In the event of a “Lost Link”
3) Any time the SUAS is flown outside of the ROZ and/or R-4301
MAAF Tower: COMM 320-632-7751
MAAF Operations (use when tower is closed): COMM 320-616-2779
g) Establish communications by FM radio or cell/SAT phone with Range Control. Range Control notifies Miller
Tower before allowing the ROZ to become active.
h) Max density with the ROZ is “two” SUAS airframes allotted at one time
i) SUAS lateral limits are RESTRICTED to the designated ROZ. CRTC Maximum radius is 2000m. SUAS are
not authorized to leave the installation boundaries.
j) SUAS vertical limit is 1,500 feet above ground level (AGL
k) The standard Lost Link point for SUAS is the Launch Point within the ROZ. Upon notification of Lost Link,
SUAS Operators shall immediately notify Range Control and MAAF Tower/OPS.
l) Upon notification, MAAF Tower shall:
1) Issue advisories and ATC instructions as appropriate to insure the safe operation of all aircraft training in R4301.
2) Cease aircraft departures until status of affected SUAS/UAS is determined.
12
3) Recover other SUAS/UAS as appropriate
n) WARNING: In the event of a UAS/SUAS emergency or “lost link” notify MAAF Operations/Tower
immediately and provide the following information:
1) Call Sign
2) Type SUAS/UAS (Raven, Shadow, etc…)
3) Last known position (Using training area or latitude/longitude coordinates)
4) Last know altitude (MSL)
5) Last known heading
6) Programmed lost link procedure. (What the SUAS/UAS was programmed to do in the event of “lost link” or
return home coordinates)
o) NOTE: SUAS lost link is an emergency, but may not require crash-rescue services
2.5 UAS Operations
2.5.1 Multiple SUAS platoons: May conduct training utilizing the same launch and recovery area provided the
following minimum conditions are met (if approved).
a) Platoons must have conducted coordination and agree to the on site location(s), frequency usage, and other
established de-confliction standards and procedures deemed appropriate.
b) The SUAS must maintain at least 1,000’ horizontal and/or 500’ vertical separation from each other during the
mission.
c) Prior to conducting a climb or descent, the SUAS platoon coordinates with the other SUAS platoon to ensure
they are clear of the designated climb/descent routes.
2.5.2 Operating Altitudes
a) To provide separation between SUAS/UAS and manned aircraft, the following restrictions apply unless
otherwise authorized by the AT&A Officer and cleared by Miller Tower.
1) The SUAS is restricted to a maximum altitude of 1,500’ AGL in their assigned ROZ unless otherwise
dictated for a different altitude by Range Control.
2) SUAS is separated by utilization of a ROZ and must never mix with manned aircraft. Shadow aircraft may
be mixed with manned aircraft only within the confines of the restricted area, R-4301 and shall have lateral and/or
vertical separation provided by ATC.
3) Shadow UAS are the only UAS authorized to operate in Class D. While in Class D, manned and unmanned
aircraft shall not mix. When manned and unmanned aircraft are operating concurrently within R-4301, positive radio
communications along with Air Traffic Control assigned vertical separation will be maintained at all times.
2.5.3 Range Control will place all affected live-fire ranges in a Check-fire status when notified by the Miller Army
Airfield Control Tower.
2.5.4 The Check-fire will be lifted AFTER the MAAF Control Tower notifies Range Control that all aircraft have
departed the airspace.
2.6 Coordinating Use of Navigable Waterways
2.6.1 General
a) Safety requirements for water/ice-crossing training are similar to range firing, with the exception that a range
flag is not required.
1) Request permission from Range Control to open and close the range on a primary form of communication
only.
2) Continuously monitor the primary form of communication while the range is “Open”, to be aware of
adverse weather conditions and medical emergencies.
3) The site must have a medical aid person, aid bag, litter, litter capable vehicle with operating radio, and a
Camp Ripley map.
b) The following procedures outline the minimum requirements for safety during over-water/ice training
exercises.
1) Submit a written Operations Plan and Deliberate Risk Assessment Worksheet (DD Form 2977) to Range
Control, NLT 90 days prior.
2) The OIC and RSO must be safety certified by the Battalion Commander (O-4P or above) for over-water/ice
operations.
c) The OIC and RSO must attend a Range Safety Briefing at Range Control prior to training.
d) Ensure all over-water/ice OPLANs include adequate safety and accident prevention measures, and rescue
procedures to perform water training safely.
13
2.6.2 River Operations:
a) Commanders of units participating in river/lake/ice operations will ensure unit SOPs address all aspects of
safety for equipment and facilities being used.
b) Commanders of units ensures all applicable TCs and ARs are used in the development of their SOP,
specifically:
1) TC 21-21 Army Water Survival Training
2) AR 385-10 The Army Safety Program
(a) Tactical Water Safety Operations, Chapter 13, Paragraph 8, Page 62
(b) Water Operations, Chapter 22, Paragraph 2, Page 79
2.6.3 Wheeled/Tracked Vehicle Water/Ice-Crossing Operations
a) Units must follow guidelines and SOP IAW FM 3-34.343.
b) Commanders ensure unit SOPs address all safety aspects of equipment and facilities in use.
c) All personnel aboard each vehicle crossing the water must have approved life vests.
d) Crossing vehicles must have a functioning inter-communications system and maintain continuous contact with
the RSO.
e) Wheeled and/or tracked vehicles are not authorized to be on the ice of any lake within the Field Training Area,
unless they are part of a military Ice-Crossing training exercise.
2.7 Ammunition and Explosive Items on Ranges
2.7.1 Smoking: Smoking is prohibited at firing pads, ready storage sites, and assembly sites. "No Smoking” signs
will be prominently displayed. Smoking is also prohibited on any vehicle used to transport propellants or
explosives. The possession of matches or any other flame-producing device while working with, or transporting,
propellants or explosives is not allowed, except as required for a particular operation.
2.7.2 Positioning and Issuing Ammunition and Explosives: Ammunition, explosives, and pyrotechnics must be
positioned to minimize the potential for ignition from external sources, explosion, rapid burning, or sympathetic
detonation, and must be located and stored IAW DA Pam 385-63 Range Safety and DA Pam 385-64 Ammunition
and Explosives Safety Standards.
2.7.3 NOTE - Safeguarding, handling, and protection of ammunition and explosives against the elements is
a unit responsibility.
2.7.4 Units must adhere to the following conditions for ammunition that is stored on the ranges:
a) Two Fire Extinguishers, fully charged, and within their expiration date. (Type 10BC, per the CRTC LOG
Support Procedures SOP, and DA PAM 385-64)
b) NOTE: Units can obtain fire extinguishers from Camp Ripley Supply and Services (S&S).
c) Placed on pallets.
d) Placed in a dry place.
e) Must be covered by a tarpaulin to protect from sparks, direct sunlight, and weather.
f) Ammunition will not be stored within 1250 feet/381 meters of the field training area boundary, IAW DA PAM
385-64, le 5-1.
g) Proper placard displayed on vehicles.
h) “No Smoking within 50 Feet” and signs must be posted.
i) Guard the site at all times.
j) Incorporate Technical Bulletin 43-0250, dated 03 DEC 2007, and any Safety of Use Messages (SUOMs) or
Ammunition Information Notices (AINs) for ammunition being fired.
k) Distribution of ammunition to personnel occurs only in areas designated for that purpose, for example,
ammunition breakdown buildings, ready lines, firing lines, attack positions, assembly areas, or defilade positions.
Blank and live-fire ammunition is not authorized to be stored in, or issued from, the same building, at the same time.
l) Fuel and ammunition re-supply operations and points must be located a minimum of 300 meters apart.
m) Limit the unpacking of ammunition at the breakdown building, ammunition transfer point, or firing line to the
minimum number of rounds needed for efficient firing of the exercise. Retain packaging material, propelling
increments and fuzes until firing is complete. Do units will not burn wooden containers, or indiscriminately fire or
dispose of ammunition to preclude its return to a storage facility.
n) All ammunition unpacked for firing, but not fired, will be repackaged into its original packing configuration
prior to return to the Ammunition Supply Point, Bldg. 24-199, (320) 616-3167/3169.
14
o) Ammunition that is easily degraded by short-term exposure to moisture, such as propelling charges,
pyrotechnic signals, and simulators, must be unpacked only for the minimum amount of time consistent with
mission requirements.
p) Small arms ammunition and pyrotechnics may be stored in the Cantonment Area if sufficient safety and
security measures are taken, in accordance with Army Regulation 190-11 Physical Security of Arms, Ammunition,
and Explosives. No other ammunition is authorized for storage within the Cantonment Area. Storage requirements
may be coordinated with the Camp Ripley Ammunition Office.
q) Transport all ammunition, explosives, and pyrotechnics in accordance with 49 CFR.
1) All personnel transporting ammunition, explosives, and pyrotechnics must have completed the Hazardous
Material Transportation Course.
2) All vehicles must have proper placards while transporting ammunition, explosives, and pyrotechnics.
r) All units operating an Ammunition Transfer Point (ATP) conduct operations IAW DA PAM 385-64.
2.7.5 Qualification and Restriction of Ammunition and Explosives:
a) The use of nonstandard ammunition and explosive items is strictly prohibited.
b) Field expedient explosive devices as prescribed by applicable FMs and TMs are authorized for use, contingent
on the approval of the RCO. A risk assessment and an item specific SOP must be submitted before approval is
granted.
c) Do not use live ammunition, and items that contain explosives or propellants, as training aids for classroom
instruction.
d) Unit ammunition personnel must be familiar with inherent hazards of specific types of ammunition, proper
identification markings, and color codes.
e) Utilize certified ammunition for exercises that require overhead fire of unprotected troops (that is, certified
propellant, projectile, and fuze). List of certified ammunition is available at the Ammunition Supply Point, Bldg.
24-199, (320) 616-3167/3169.
f) Only approved munitions listed in the Munitions History Program at:
https://mhp.redstone.army.mil/modules/Notices/AppendixB.aspx is authorized for firing on Camp Ripley.
g) Do not fire defective ammunition. Immediately report concerns about defective ammunition to the
Ammunition Officer or Quality Assurance Specialist-Ammunition Surveillance (QASAS). Examples of defective
ammunition are:
1) Fuzes or fuzed rounds that are inadequately tightened, insecurely staked, or are missing safety devices.
2) Safe and arming mechanisms, if so equipped, are in the “armed” position.
3) Ammunition showing deterioration.
4) Ammunition showing evidence of defects in material or assembly.
5) Ammunition that has been dropped, and there is visible damage.
6) Do not issue ammunition and unopened ammunition packaging which shows evidence of tampering until it
is cleared by the QASAS or ASP Officer.
2.7.6 Suspension of Ammunition and Explosives Involved in Malfunctions
a) The firing unit will notify Range Control immediately when any round or item of ammunition, explosives, or
their components malfunctions. Range Control notifies the Ammunition Officer or the QASAS. The OIC and RSO
must suspend the use of the lot in question.
b) The Camp Ripley Ammunition Manager must substantiate, or withdraw, the suspension, per AR 75-1.
c) Suspended ammunition is not authorized for use in training.
d) Firing of any “restricted” ammunition is conducted only in accordance with the restriction requirements.
2.8 Misfire Procedures/Reporting
2.8.1 NOTE: Misfire is failure of a round to fire.
2.8.2 Follow misfire procedures in Technical Manuals (TMs) for the appropriate weapon system. In the event
misfires present an immediate hazard to personnel, IMMEDIATELY report the type of round, the location, unit,
and give the point-of-contact information of the individual having knowledge of the misfire to Range Control.
2.8.3 Affected ammunition lot(s) must be recorded as a malfunction, and reported to the Ammunition Supply Point
immediately when dud and misfire rates equal or exceed the rates given in Appendix B of AR 75-1.
2.8.4 A misfire of any serial numbered munitions MUST be reported to Range Control and the ASP immediately.
2.9 Unexploded Ordnance (UXO) Reporting
2.9.1 NOTE: UXO (Duds) are munitions which have been fired or projected, and are armed, but have failed
to function.
15
2.9.2 The Range OIC will report all UXO (dud) ammunition to Range Control. Range firing must cease and the
range will be closed until qualified EOD personnel can clear a dud in the event that grenades or other munitions
pose an immediately hazardous to personnel, firing will be halted and the range will be closed until qualified EOD
personnel clear the dud. In all other cases, firing will not be halted. Notify Range Control to fill out an Explosive
Ordnance Incident Report, DA Form 3265. Units must also remember to enter Dud information into TAMIS.
a) Do not handle duds, to include rounds observed striking the impact area, but fail to detonate.
b) Mark the area if duds are found outside of impact area.
c) Route traffic a safe distance around marked areas, and report to Range Control immediately. The report must
include the following information:
1) Type and size of dud.
2) Location by grid coordinate with other descriptions to pinpoint dud. Prepare a map overlay indicating
location of dud, and submit to Range Control, upon request.
3) Name, Rank, and Unit of individual reporting the dud.
2.10 Disposition of Ammunition and Explosives Involved in Malfunctions and Accidents
2.10.1 Materiel involved in malfunctions or accidents and any evidence, such as components or fragments of the
weapon system, ammunition, missile, or rocket must carefully preserved in the position and location it occupied at
the time of the accident. If the material has been involved in a Class A or B accident, it will remain in place until
disposition is directed by the Investigating Officer, unless immediate hazard to life or property are present.
a) Class A Accident
1) Property damage is $1,000,000.00 or more, and/or
2) Aircraft or missile destroyed, abandoned, or missing, and/or
3) Injury and/or occupational illness resulting in a sudden death fatality or permanent total disability?
b) Class B Accident
1) Is property damage > $200,000.00 but < $1,000,000.00, and
2) Is there an injury and/or occupational illness resulting in a permanent partial disability
3) Three (3) or more personnel hospitalized as a result of a single occurrence?
c) Damaged or malfunctioned guided missiles and rockets are reported IAW AR 75-1, and handled per the
applicable TM.
2.11 Ammunition Turn-in Procedures
2.11.1 Turn in all ammunition to the ASP with 100% accountability IAW DA Pam 710-2-1, Appendices J and K;
and the Camp Ripley ASP External SOP (Post Regulation, Chapter 4, 4-8, paragraph c).
2.11.2 Store all munitions and pyrotechnics will be sorted by type and lot number.
2.11.3 Turn in ammunition by-products, such as canisters from expended containers, hand held flares, etc., to the
ASP.
2.11.4 Do not mix usable munitions and pyrotechnics with misfired ammunition. See 2.6.7 for Misfire procedures.
2.11.5 NOTE: Return small arms residue to the ASP IAW the following procedures:
2.11.6 Inspect expended cartridge cases for live rounds, and verify that they are free of dirt, rocks, grass, and litter.
Segregated expended cartridges by type and place in wooden ammunition wire-bound boxes, or the commercially
packaged cardboard ammunition boxes, prior to turn-in. Metal cans must be empty upon turn in. One hundred
percent (100%) accountability is required for all ammunition and residue.
2.11.7 Maintain packing material in a serviceable condition.
2.11.8 The ASP must inspect all residue.
2.11.9 NOTE: TURN-INS THAT DO NOT COMPLY WITH THE ABOVE CONDITIONS WILL BE
REJECTED, AND DEFICIENCIES WILL BE CORRECTED BEFORE BEING ACCEPTED BY THE ASP.
2.11.10 Corrective action WILL be accomplished by the unit prior to re-inspection and acceptance of salvage
material by the ASP.
2.11.11 NOTE: Commanders must conduct inspections to ensure personnel do not possess or have access to
live ammunition after firing.
2.11.12 Destruction of UXO: Only EOD personnel are authorized to conduct destruction of dud ammunition
2.11.13 Policing the Training Complex:
a) Removal of spent brass, unfired rounds, or components of fired rounds from the Impact Areas is prohibited.
16
b) Dumping and/or burying of ammunition or explosives into the Training Areas and/or Impact Areas is
prohibited.
c) Unauthorized removal of ammunition, pyrotechnics, explosives, and residue from munitions from the training
complex is prohibited.
d) Units must collect a minimum of 50% of spent brass when blank ammunition is expended from mounted or
dismounted weapons over extended terrain.
2.11.14 Amnesty Program: Camp Ripley recognizes the need for an Ammunition Amnesty Program. All military
amnesty ammunition can be turned in at the Ammunition Office, Building 24-199, 320-616-3167/3168/3169 during
normal business hours. There is also an Amnesty box located at the south entrance to the building for non-business
hour deposits.
2.11.15 Ammunition References:
a) FM 4-30.13
b) FM 4-30.51
c) DA PAM 710-2-1
d) AR 75-1
e) DA PAM 385-64
f) NGR 385-64
g) AR 385-10
h) TB 9-1300-38
i) AR 190-11
j) CRTC ASP External SOP
2.12 Range Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Requirements
2.12.1 Training casualties on operational ranges must be minimized through the use of appropriate personal
protective equipment (PPE). Reference Table 2-2 for required PPE levels. Ultimately, the commander must decide
the appropriate level of PPE based on completion of a thorough risk assessment.
2.12.2 All personnel within the hearing hazard zone will wear approved hearing protection. The size of the hazard
zone varies with the weapon. The following list of distances to the hazard contours for common military weapons is
conservative:
a) .50 caliber: 55 m to the side, 12 m to the rear.
b) .45 caliber: 12 m to the side, 4.5 m to the rear.
c) 9 mm: 9 m to the side, 6 m to the rear.
d) 7.62 mm: 20 m to the side, 8 m to the rear.
e) 5.56 mm: 24 m to the side, 6 m to the rear.
2.12.3 WARNING: Per Ammunition Information Notice (AIN) 053-10, dated 10FEB10, DODIC: AA54
DOUBLE HEARING PROTECTION (EARPLUGS AND MUFFS) AND EYE PROTECTION
(GOGGLES) SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDIERS FIRING THE SHOTGUN AND BY SOLDIERS
WITHIN 8.5 METERS OF THE WEAPON DURING DOOR BREACHING OPERATIONS WHEN FIRING
IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO REFLECTIVE SURFACE. ALL SOLDIERS WITHIN 8.5 METERS TO 30
METERS OF THE FIRING POINT SHOULD WEAR SINGLE HEARING PROTECTION (EARPLUGS
OR MUFFS). REFERENCE TM 9-1005-338-13&P, TECHNICAL MANUAL UNIT AND DIRECT
SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL, MOSSBERG 12 GAUGE SHOTGUN, MODEL 500 AND
MOSSBERG 12 GAUGE SHOTGUN MODEL 590, MAY 2005.
2.12.4 Approved eye protection (or eye armor) is encouraged, especially during force-on-force training maneuvers
or scenarios by personnel undergoing training, as well as those in close proximity (for example, evaluators,
observers, and very important persons.)
2.12.5 Refer to table 2-2 for protective required levels as listed in DA PAM 385-63 and Range PPE Equipment
requirements in Appendix K Range Control Tables.
2.12.6 NOTE: All personnel must wear the Kevlar/ACH and IBA when required by regulation, FM, or
SOP. When it is not specifically required, wearing of the Kevlar/ACH is at the Commander's discretion. All
personnel occupying a Live-Fire range or Firing Point will utilize hearing protection devices and eye
protection when required.
2.13 Range Targets
2.13.1 General Requirements for Targets and Target Mechanisms:
17
a) Target types are locally manufactured, as prescribed in TC 25-8 Training Ranges, or commercially purchased
prefabricated targets.
b) Requests for targets must be submitted made NLT 90 days in advance of range use.
c) All issue and receipt of targets, and target accessories, will be handled through the Automated Target Systems
(ATS) Office, Bldg.2-198, 320-616-3132/3133, or at Range Control, Bldg.24-199, 320-616-3137/3134.
d) Using units are responsible for the setup, maintenance, and cleanup of all target materials.
e) Target accessories (lifters, thermals, batteries, chargers, etc.) are available at ATS.
f) ATS personnel operates, or provide guidance for operation of, target lifting devices.
g) Using units can hand receipt a Target Repair Kit from Automated Target Systems, for all types of target repair
needs.
2.13.2 Moving Targets:
a) Armor Moving Target Carriers (AMTC) are available on selected ranges.
b) Moving targets may be fitted with Target Kill Simulators, Hostile Fire Lamps, or Hostile Fire Simulators upon
request.
2.13.3 Ground Targets:
a) Small Arms
1) Enhanced Remote Target Systems (ERETS) small lifters are stationary, and used for familiarization and
qualification on selected small arms ranges (see Range Descriptions Appendix A).
2) Targets for these ranges will be the standard E or 3D type as prescribed in TC 25-8.
3) ATS personnel maintain all targets.
4) Targets will not be changed on the day of firing due to time constraints.
5) Selected targets have Muzzle Flash Simulators for night fire use.
b) Tank/Bradley Ranges
1) ERETS heavy lifters are used for familiarization and qualification on selected ranges (see Range
Descriptions Appendix A Miller Complex section).
2) Heavy target lifters may be fitted with Target Kill Simulators, Hostile Fire Lamps, or Hostile Fire
Simulators upon request.
2.13.4 Radio Controlled Targets:
a) M31 Infantry Target lifters and Heavy lifters are portable and available for use on Camp Ripley, with approval
from Range Control, and coordination with Automated Target Systems.
b) Infantry Target lifters are designed for use with single or double infantryman type targets only (E, Double E,
or 3D type holders must be manufactured).
2.13.5 Human Form Targets: Human Form Targets (HFTs) are three-dimensional precision targets that replicate
male and female enemy (uniformed with weapons and equipment), non-combatant male and female, and combatant
non-uniformed male/female/child. The HFTs on Camp Ripley will only be used to depict Non-combatant Civilianson-the-Battlefield (COBs). Do not fire at HFTs using live ammunition under any circumstances.
2-14 Rappel Tower
CRTC Rappel Safety Personnel terminology:
Rappel Safety Officer=Range OIC
Rappel Lane NCO=Range RSO
Rappel Master (Only required while performing Helicopter Skid or Australian-Style Rappels)
2.14.1 Military units must consult TC 21-24 in preparation of and during conduct of rappelling. Units may conduct
ground training, East wall side and West ledge side tower rappelling without a Rappel Master. In this case, the Unit
Commander is responsible for the safety of the rappelling training. Military units must utilize Camp Ripley Range
Control rappelling equipment. Civilian agencies must use their own equipment, and follow their own training
guidelines.
a) The Rappel Master, Rappel Safety Officer, and Rappel Lane NCO MUST be listed on a Safety Certification
Memorandum.
b) The Rappel Master, Rappel Safety Officer, and Rappel Lane NCO must attend a Range Control Safety
Briefing prior to tower operations.
c) Rappel Safety Officer must have a Deliberate Risk Assessment Worksheet completed and on the range while
the range is in use, and update the Worksheet as necessary, per AR 385-10 and ATP 5-19.
d) The following personnel must be on the range during tower operations:
1) Rappel Master (only while using the Helicopter Skid)
2) Rappel Safety Officer
3) Rappel Lane NCO (one per Rappel Lane)
4) Belayer Safety (one for every 2 lanes
18
5) Belayer (one for every rope)
6) MOS qualified Medic or EMT (see Appendix I Medical Requirements).
e) Rappel Safety personnel must meet the qualifications outlined in TC 21-24, when conducting advanced
rappelling techniques or operations utilizing the helicopter skid, or while performing Australian Style Rappelling.
The Rappel Safety Officer and Rappel Lane NCO must be certified by a Rappel Master within the last 6 months.
NOTE: At a minimum you must have 2 qualified Air Assault or Rangers meaning both your OIC and RSO
must meet the requirement. The helicopter skid pad is not authorized for use unless you have a qualified
Rappel Master.
Rappel Master requirements:
1) Must be an E-7 or above.
2) Must have completed a TRADOC approved Rappel Master Course.
3) Recertification MUST be current.
4) Must be Air Assault or Ranger qualified.
5) Has overall responsibility for the safe conduct of tower operations.
Rappel Safety Officer (CRTC OIC) requirements:
1) Must be an E-7 or above.
2) Must be Air Assault or Ranger qualified.
3) Has overall responsibility for the safe conduct of tower operations.
Rappel Lane NCO (CRTC RSO) requirements:
1) Must be a Sergeant (E-5) or above.
2) Is selected by the company commander.
Belayer Safety requirements:
1) Ensures belayers are performing their duties properly.
Belayer duties:
1) Ensures that the rappel ropes are even with the ground.
2) Does not wear gloves.
3) Watches the rappeller at all times. Maintains constant voice contact with the rappeller.
4) Wears a Kevlar helmet to prevent injury from falling debris.
Medical support personnel:
1) Must have a COMPLETE Aid Bag.
2) Must have a litter.
3) Must have a medical evacuation vehicle with an operational radio and Camp Ripley Map.
4) Ensure that the Backboard and “C” Collar are in the storage box on the tower.
5) Medics WILL not transport personnel anywhere if they fall from the tower. Stabilize ONLY!
6) Must know the Camp Ripley Medical Response Procedures
19
Chapter 3
Danger Zones
3.1 General
3.1.1 NOTE: A copy of the SDZ must be in the range packet for all established ranges that units sign for at
Range Control. Units need to obtain an approved copy of the SDZ from Range Control that has been verified
prior to opening the range.
3.1.2 NOTE: Every weapon system and the ammunition/ordnance related to that weapon system requires a
danger zone. The danger zones in DA PAM 385-63, chapter 3 represent minimum safety requirements.
3.2 Authorization for Personnel within Danger Zones
3.2.1 The following personnel are authorized to be within a danger zone, subject to the restrictions in the
applicable sections of this regulation, DA PAM 385-63, and application of the risk management process by the
senior installation commander.
a) Crews directly involved in the firing of a weapon system or munitions
b) Tactical air control party or joint terminal attack controllers (JTACs) controlling aviation ordnance deliveries.
c) Canon launched guided projectile (Copperhead) fire support team (FIST) personnel located in the mission
essential area (MEA). FIST personnel are allowed within the SDZ when the Copperhead is not fired in the ballistic
mode.
d) Aircrews operating within danger zones as part of an exercise.
e) During indirect field artillery firing, personnel may be in Areas A through E subject to the restrictions in
chapter 10 of this regulation and DA PAM 385-63.
f) Designator operators (laser) during AGM–114 HELLFIRE antitank guided missile operations.
g) Personnel down range when approved overhead small arms ammunition is fired.
h) Personnel wearing approved laser eye protection within the laser surface danger zone.
i) Personnel down range when supporting training on known distance firing ranges, when protection is provided.
j) Authorization of any other personnel within danger zones requires deviation approval per AR 385–63/MCO
3570. 1C and paragraph 1–4 of DA PAM 385-63.
20
Chapter 4
Small Arms & Machine Guns
4.1 Firing Conditions
4.1.1 The following ranges are available for a variety small arms weapons and machine guns: (For detailed
information on the below ranges, see Appendix A)
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-9
A-12
A-14
B-1
B-2
Center
Small Arms Known Distance
Combat Pistol Qualification
Automated Record Fire
Automated Record Fire
M203/M320 Training Practice Ammo
25m Zero
Live Fire Facility
25m Zero
25m Zero
Multi-Purpose Range (MPR)
Under Construction
CLFX
Convoy Live Fire Exercise
D
East
Shotgun/Short Range Marksmanship
Multi-Purpose Range (MPR)
F
F&M-1
F&M-2
IPBC
ISBC
J
M
MK-19
North
Biathlon Course/25m Zero
Fire and Movement
Fire and Movement
Infantry Platoon Battle Course
Infantry Squad Battle Course
M320, M2, M240, MK-19 (TP-T Only)
25m Zero/Mortar SRTR
MK-19 Qualification (TP-T Only)
MPMG (M2,M240,M249)
OP-23
MK-19 HE
SEAL
CABIN
UAC
West
Non-Standard Small Arms
Urban Assault Course (5.56 & 40mm TP)
MPMG (M2,M240,M249, SNIPER)
4.1.2 Small arms may be fired at other locations when the following conditions exist:
a) The Surface Danger Zone can be employed without significant impact on other range operations or training
areas.
b) The RCO has approved the location.
c) An operations safety plan and a Deliberate Risk Assessment Worksheet (DD From 2977) have been
developed by the unit, detailing the measures they will take.
d) All other conditions for live fire exist as outlined in paragraph 2-3 (range Use by non-military/civilian
agencies).
e) NOTE: The batwing must be considered when designing or conducting training on ranges that involve
fire and movement, fire and maneuver, flanking fire, and/or when ricochet hazards outside the range
boundary may endanger nonparticipating personnel. Decision on the use of batwing is based on level of risk
and approval of appropriate command risk acceptance authority in accordance with DA Pam 385-30. An
Exception to Policy memo must be submitted to Range Control to be verified and sent through channels for
approval by the Camp Ripley Post Commander (per DA Pam 385-63, para 4-1c.)
4.2 Overhead Fire
4.2.1 Overhead small arms fire above protected troops is authorized when minimum protection (shown in table 6-1
of DA Pam 385-63) is provided.
4.2.2 Overhead fire above unprotected troops with small arms may be conducted when authorized by the Post
Commander and specifically approved by the RCO.
4.2.3 Weapon systems authorized for overhead fire of unprotected troops are 5.56 mm, 7.62 mm, and .50 caliber
machine guns. The weapons must be on ground tripods, or in vehicle mounts (ring mounts excluded) firing from a
stationary position.
4.2.4 Only ammunition certified as cleared for overhead fire in TB 9-1300-385 will be used. NSN and DOD
Ammunition Code identify small arms ammunition certified for overhead fire of unprotected troops.
4.2.5 Rates of fire must not exceed 70 rounds per minute for 5.56 mm and 7.62 mm machineguns, and 40 rounds
per minute for .50 caliber machineguns. Tracer ammunition may be used to assist in monitoring projectile paths.
4.2.6 Overhead fire with machineguns in live fire exercises must follow these procedures:
a) Firing positions for weapons delivering overhead fire must provide unobstructed fields of fire.
b) Utilize applicable ballistic firing les to determine the minimum angle of elevation for all overhead fire.
Projectiles will not be permitted to impact between the firing position and unprotected troops downrange. All
impacts must be at least 30 meters beyond the personnel most distant from the weapon.
c) Utilize positive stops to prevent crossfire and depression of weapon systems during overhead firing.
21
d) Test fire weapon systems before delivery of overhead fire to verify the effectiveness of the positive traverse
and depression stops.
4.3 Flanking Fire
4.3.1 Ground-mounted or vehicle-mounted small arms may be used to provide low angle flanking fire when a
minimum angle of 15 degrees between the limit of fire and exposed troops is maintained.
4.3.2 Employ positive means to ensure that the firing unit knows the location of the maneuver units while fire
support is being provided.
4.3.3 Describe in detail, the route and location of maneuver units and the location of the weapons providing
flanking fire support using recognizable natural or manmade terrain features, or other positive identification features
to all involved personnel.
4.4 Blank Ammunition
4.4.1 NOTE: Per NGR 385-63, Chapter 4, paragraph 4-6, an OIC/RSO with the rank of E-5 or above is
required when using Blank ammunition.
4.4.2 NOTE: When using blank ammunition on any range or training area you are required to use the
BLANKS/SIMUNITIONS/LESS-LETHAL RANGES OPENING/CLOSING CHECKLIST.
4.4.3 NOTE: The use of blank ammunition does not require a range flag.
4.4.4 Exercise the same precautions in loading, unloading, and clearing weapons during blank ammunition firing,
as when firing live ammunition.
4.4.5 Use of troops will not use blank ammunition during hand-to-hand training is not authorized.
4.4.6 Blank ammunition cannot be fired in the Cantonment Area without approval from the Camp Ripley Director
of Security, Phone # (320) 616-3087/3088.
4.4.7 Attach blank Firing Attachments (BFA) (blank adapters) will be attached to all weapon systems that have
approved BFA manufactured for them. Do not fire weapons without the proper BFA.
a) NOTE: A five (5) meter Safe Separation Distance (SSD) must be observed at all times.
b) DANGER – Do not fire small arms blank ammunition (5.56 mm and 7.62 mm) within 5 meters of
personnel. A distance of 20 meters should be maintained from personnel while firing .50 cal. machine gun
blank ammunition.
4.4.8 A dispersion angle of 10 degrees on either side of the Gun Target Line (GTL) must also be observed.
4.4.9 BDUs/ACUs should be worn at all times. Eye protection should be worn by the firer.
4.4.10 A violation of the SSD could result in serious injury. Fatal injury may occur if the SSD is decreased to
within 0.9 meters.
4.4.11 Live and blank ammunition will not be stored together or issued simultaneously from the same ammo point
to individual troops or crews of combat or combat support vehicles prior to the initiation of a force-on-force training
exercise.
4.4.12 Commanders must ensure that there is no live ammunition on board vehicles or in possession of troops
prior to initiating force-on-force training. Allocated reasonable period of time to ensure that no live ammunition
remains with Soldiers preparing to receive blank munitions for field training.
4.4.13 Weapons that are firing blank ammunition must have the blank firing adapter affixed to the weapon. This
provides clear notice that blanks are in use, and prevents possible projection of particles directly at a Soldier during
training operations.
4.5 Machine Guns
4.5.1 Load the weapon only when ready to fire.
4.5.2 Keep the finger outside the trigger guard until ready to fire.
4.5.3 Keep the weapon pointed downrange. If the weapon continues to fire after the trigger is released (Runaway
Gun).
4.5.4 Put machine gun covers in the raised position except while firing.
4.5.5 Train all personnel firing .50 caliber machine guns on the proper conduct of headspace and timing
procedures.
4.5.6 Machine guns are “loaded” whenever a belt or magazine remains inserted in the weapon.
22
4.6 Automated Ranges Night Firing Procedures
4.6.1 There must be one Line Safety per firing position. Safety vests are located on the ranges.
4.6.2 Each Line Safety must have a flashlight with the clear lens installed.
4.6.3 Ammunition will only be issued to the Line Safeties, when told to do so by the Tower Operator.
Ammunition will only be issued to the firing order occupying the firing line.
4.6.4 Follow the directions of the Tower Operator at all times.
4.7 Unestablished Ranges
Units requesting a training area to conduct a Live Fire Exercise (LFX) must have a detailed risk management plan
presented to Range Control NLT 90 days in advance of the exercise. (See Chapter 17 for additional requirements
for Live Fire Exercises)
4.8 Additional Information
4.8.1 Automated Ranges
a) Units are also required to fulfill requirements of the specific range SOPs in addition to requirements of this
regulation. The SOPs are located in the range packets, or can be requested through Range Control.
b) Changes to automated range scenarios must be requested NLT 72 hours prior to firing.
c) Assistant RSOs will be assigned as directed in the range SOP.
d) Night firing will be altered to allow only the 25m or 50m qualification. Units will not be allowed to change
firing distances during periods of darkness, unless they can provide the RCO with a detailed safety operations plan
that insures the safety of all personnel involved with night firing.
4.8.2 M16-/M4-Series Ranges
a) Reference pages 6-10 of FM 3-22.9 for uniform item requirements during weapon qualification firing.
b) Kevlar helmets and body armor are required in the “Pits” area of the A-1 range while the range is firing.
c) Automatic rifles are considered loaded when a magazine is in the receiver.
4.8.3 Clearing Barrel Usage: Per the PS Magazine Number 632, dated JUL 2005, Clearing Rods are NOT to be
used for clearing M16/M4 series weapons. Reference the Weapons Handling Procedures Handout for complete
weapon clearing instructions. The Handout is available at Range Control.
4.8.4 NOTE: Rifle bolts will remain open and locked to the rear, except during firing.
4.8.5 NOTE: If personnel move from one firing position to another, they may carry the weapon with the
muzzle pointed down range, or they may carry the weapon in the “Low Ready” position with the muzzle
pointed down range.
4.9 References
4.8.1 FM 3-22.9 Rifle Marksmanship M16-/M4-Series Weapons, dated AUG 2008
4.8.2 FM 3-22.65-Browning Machine Gun, Caliber .50 HB, M2 w/Change 1
4.8.3 FM 3-22.68-Crew-Served Machine Guns M249/M240B
4.8.4 FM 3-23.35-Combat Training with Pistols M9 and M11 w/Changes 1-4
4.8.5 FM 23-10
4.8.6 TC-7-9 Infantry Live-Fire Training
23
Chapter 5
Grenades and Grenade Launchers
5.1 Hand Grenades
5.1.1 High explosive loaded type grenades. These contain explosive charges that detonate after a short delay (3 to
5 seconds). Take every precaution necessary to prevent injury from flying fragments. Fragmentation and offensive
hand grenades will be thrown from a trench or barrier equivalent to a screen of sandbags 0.5 meter thick during
training exercises.
5.1.2 Firing conditions for fragmentation and offensive grenades
a) Personnel must wear body armor and helmet with hearing/eye protection Personal Protective Level 1(Table 22) if they are within the 150-meter danger area when casualty producing hand grenades are thrown.
b) Do not remove safety clips on fragmentation and practice grenades until the safety pin is removed. The
grenade must be thrown once the safety pin has been removed. Do NOT attempt to re-insert the safety pin.
c) All personnel must be proficient in the safety precautions for handling and throwing grenades before live
grenade training begins. Soldiers MUST qualify on A-10 Hand Grenade Qualification Course, and COMPLETE
practice grenade training in a Mock Bay (on L/HGR Range) prior to live grenade training on the Hand Grenade
Range (HGR).
d) OICs, RSOs, and live-bay ARSOs for live grenade training events must be certified to perform these duties.
Certification will include training detailing necessary actions in the event of a dropped grenade, short throw, grenade
thrown other than downrange, SDZ, control of observers, misfire/dud grenade procedures, arming, throwing
techniques, and pre-live bay requirements. RSOs and ARSOs must be qualified with the hand grenade prior to
assuming their duties.
e) Only EOD personnel are authorized to approach dud high explosive grenades. Adjacent throwing bays to the
one with the dud will be closed until EOD personnel clear the dud.
f) Personnel must remain under protected cover for 30 minutes after a Hand Grenade malfunction.
g) Do not throw live grenades into standing water, deep snow, or dense vegetation.
h) Range OICs and RSOs are cautioned that multiple employments of grenades in a training scenario
significantly increase the difficulty of determining the actual number of grenades that detonated. Subsequent
training scenarios, generating an unplanned detonation, may activate dud grenades.
5.1.3 Prior to using the practice hand grenade, Baseball G811, the OIC must:
a) Inspect the body for cracks.
b) Inspect for foreign material in grenade body and in the fuze opening threads.
c) Insure that the porthole in the base is not blocked.
d) Insert a new fuze, preparing the grenade for reuse.
5.2 Hand Grenade Range (HGR) (Live Fire Familiarization)
The Hand Grenade Range offers the individual Soldier the opportunity to meet the new STRAC requirement to
throw live hand grenades. Reference FM 3-23.30 and the Live Hand Grenade Course SOP for additional
information on Hand Grenades.
5.2.1 NOTE: Units MUST coordinate the use of HE Grenades with Range Control NLT 90 days in advance.
Range Control must provide EOD a warning of scheduled range dates.
5.2.2 All safety measures and precautions must be followed.
5.2.3 Range personnel requirements are as follows for live fire:
a) OIC (E-7 and above)
b) RSO (E-6 and above)
c) ARSO-Live-Bay NCO (Corporal and above)
d) Gate Guard-2
e) Medic
f) Range NCOIC
5.2.4 A range specific safety briefing must be given to all personnel prior to range operations.
5.2.5 The Range OIC must maintain communications with the gate guard at all times.
5.2.6 Do not expose range personnel to noise levels of more than 1000 grenades per day.
5.2.7 All personnel must know the Hand Grenade Status levels:
a) SAFE: A grenade with all of the safety devices intact.
b) LIVE: A thrown hand grenade from the instant it leaves the throwers hand until the expected fuze time has
elapsed.
24
c) DUD: A thrown grenade that failed to detonate after the expected fuze time has elapsed.
5.2.8 Units may also consider scheduling the A-10 Hand Grenade Qualification Course to conduct familiarization
training and raise Soldier confidence levels prior to utilizing this range.
5.3 Grenade Launchers and Grenade Machine Guns
Personnel must be instructed in the proper use of grenade launchers and grenade machine guns, and applicable
safety precautions before firing live ammunition.
5.3.1 Report all duds to Range Control.
5.3.2 M203/M320 Grenade Launchers
a) A-9 is the Grenade Launcher Qualification Range.
b) HE M320 40mm is authorized for firing into Hendrickson or Leach Impact Areas only.
c) Illumination rounds fired from the M320/M320 will be treated the same as hand held signals, and may be
utilized where they are permitted.
d) Hazardous fragmentation from HE grenade ammunition may be experienced to 165-meters from the point of
detonation.
e) OICs and RSOs must ensure that only low-velocity grenade cartridges are being fired.
f) Single hearing protection will be worn within 2 meters of the grenade launchers. A Kevlar Helmet and
IOTV/IBA will be worn while firing HE M320/M320 40mm grenades.
5.3.3 Grenade Machine Guns (MK19)
a) J, K, and MK-19 Ranges are approved for 40mm TP rounds only. Other firing points may be requested
through Range Control NLT 90 days in advance.
b) OP-23 is the only authorized range for MK-19 40mm HE rounds.
c) Engage targets only at ranges greater than 75 meters with TP ammunition.
d) Engage targets only at ranges greater than 310 meters with HE ammunition.
e) Firing through obstructions is prohibited.
f) Body Armor, eye and ear protection, and Kevlar helmet must be worn at all times. Approved hearing
protection is required for all personnel within the noise hazard contour of 20-meter radius around the weapon
system.
g) Firing over open hatches is not authorized.
5.3.4 Restrictions for static vehicle mounted MK19:
a) A gunner’s quadrant and/or MK64, MOD 7, mount depression stop must be utilized to keep the minimum
elevation above 30 mils when firing.
b) For M998 vehicles-Soft top must be covering the driver and passenger.
c) The driver’s hatch must be closed when firing over the left side, forward, or right side of the M113 and M106
vehicle, or when personnel or objects in hatch areas are forward of the weapon muzzle.
5.3.5 Restrictions for moving vehicle mounted MK19, per DA Pamphlet 385-63: To preclude unintentional
impacts of HE and HEDP ammunition at ranges less than 310 meters:
a) Restrict speeds to not greater than 16 kph/10 mph when firing from the HMMWV M1025/1026 armament
carrier, M998T interim squad carrier, and the M1114 over paved and improved roads in good condition, and not
greater than 8 kph/5 mph over rough roads, trails, and cross-country.
5.3.6 Restrict speeds to not greater than 16 kph/10 mph when firing from the M113 and M106 personnel carriers
on any kind of terrain.
5.3.7 NOTE: When conducting a range utilizing grenade launchers or machine guns OIC must be E-7 or
higher and RSO must be E-6 or higher.
5.4 References
5.4.1 FM 3-22.27-MK19 40mm Grenade Machine Gun MOD 3 w/Change 1
5.4.2 FM 3-22.31-M320 40mm Grenade Launcher w/ Change 1
5.4.3 TM 3-22.31 (FM 3-22.31) 40mm Grenade Launchers November 2010 w/Change 1
5.4.4 FM 3-23.30-Grenades and Pyrotechnic Signals w/Change 1
25
Chapter 6
Antitank Rockets
6.1 Firing Conditions
6.1.1 The following ranges are authorized for firing antitank rockets:
a) J - Practice and HEAT
b) K - Practice and HEAT
6.1.2 Personnel must not stand or have any portion of the body directly in front of or behind a loaded rocket
launcher.
6.1.3 Clear the SDZ to the rear of the launcher (100m back blast area) of personnel, material (including expended
cartridge cases), and readily combustible vegetation before firing.
6.1.4 Cover ammunition stored on rocket ranges. Store ammunition to the flank of firing positions, and out of the
direct rays of the sun.
6.1.5 Do not fire ammunition during temperatures other than those prescribed on the round.
6.1.6 Do not fire AT-4s from within a building, or within 50 meters of a vertical or nearly vertical backstop,
barrier, or obstacle, because of the risk of debris ricochets.
6.1.7 Personnel within 390 meters of the weapon must wear approved single hearing protection.
6.1.8 Prone or foxhole firing of HE AT-4 (M136) is not authorized. In training, an individual may fire one round
from the sitting position, or three rounds from the standing or kneeling positions in a 24-hour period.
6.1.9 The firing of antitank rockets over unprotected troops from a moving vehicle or aircraft is not authorized.
6.1.10 Units must ensure that they have received a copy of AIN 55-06 from the ASP prior to going down range.
6.1.11 Follow all procedures and precautions in the applicable FMs and TMs during pre-fire checks and firing
operations.
6.1.12 NOTE: Per FM 3-23.25, Appendix A, para. A-3, page A-2, the dimensions of all back blast areas and
Safety Zones will be doubled when operating temperatures fall below freezing (0 deg Celsius/32 deg
Fahrenheit).
6.1.13 NOTE: Per FM 3-23.25, Appendix A, para. A-12, le A-2, page A-5, a Soldier may only fire, observe
fire, or act as a Safety NCO for the M1316 AT-4 one to three times, depending on the firing position within a
24-hour period. Three times total if the M136 is fired from either the standing or kneeling positions. One
time total if the M136 is fired from the sitting position.
6.2 References
6.2.1 FM 3-23.25-Light Anti-Armor Weapons
6.2.2 FM 3-06.11 Combined Arms Operations in Urban Terrain
6.2.3 TM 9-1315-886-12 – AT-4
6.2.4 TM 9-1340-203-20 – LAW
26
Chapter 7
Antitank Guided Missiles
7.1 Tow Missiles
7.1.1 Firing conditions - General
a) The TOW missile (inert round) can be fired on East Range, K Range, and OP-2.
b) The entire SDZ will be cleared of all non-mission essential personnel before firing TOW missiles.
c) TOW missile firings must be accomplished within predetermined boundaries. The RCO will ensure that an
adequate SDZ exists.
d) Observe all procedures and precautions in FMs and TMs in preparation and firing operations.
e) Only those personnel actively engaged in firing and controlling the Ground Mounted TOW missile system
will be at the launch point, with protective body armor, Kevlar helmet, eye, and hearing protection.
f) Personnel at launch point must not stand, nor permit any part of their body to be, directly behind or in front of
the launcher while missile is in the launch tube.
g) Do not fire TOW missiles from within buildings or within 100 meters of any vertical or nearly vertical
backstop.
h) The range must be inspected after TOW firing activities to ensure, to the maximum extent possible that all
guidance wires are removed from the range. Aircraft will not be used to remove guidance wire.
i) Occupation of Area I, the area directly in front of the weapon, is prohibited.
j) Test all missiles using the missile test set as part of the overall system pre-fire checks. This will identify
missiles with a potential for operational failures.
7.1.2 Surface Danger Zone
a) Area F danger area to the rear of the launcher is 100 meters.
b) Single hearing protection must be worn by all personnel within the rectangle 100 meters to either side and 200
meters to the rear of the TOW.
c) OIC and RSO must ensure no personnel or equipment are located within this area.
d) Handel misfires and malfunctions IAW appropriate TMs.
e) MILES training:
1) The TOW missile uses the antitank weapons effect signature simulator (ATWESS) device for a noise
simulator.
2) Never arm ATWESS devices until ready to fire. A sever jolt to the ATWESS may cause the device to
function.
3) Approved single hearing protection is required.
7.2 Dragon
7.2.1 Firing Conditions
a) Dragon firing is only authorized on K Range.
b) Clear the SDZ of all non-mission essential personnel.
c) Only those personnel actively engaged in firing and control of Dragon guided missile as specified by the
appropriate FMs and TMs will be permitted in the SDZ at the time of firing. Non-operational personnel must move
to a distance of at least 50 meters to the side of the launcher (110 meters when firing M222 HEAT rounds).
d) The gunner and all personnel at launch point will wear protective body armor, Kevlar helmet, eye protection,
and single hearing protection.
e) Single hearing protection must be worn by all personnel within the rectangle 170 meters to either side, and
260 meters to the rear of the Dragon firing point.
f) Fire Dragon guided missiles according to the procedure and precautions outlined in appropriate FM's and
TM's.
7.2.2 Surface Danger Zone
a) Area F to the rear of the launcher is 50 meters.
b) OIC and RSO must ensure no personnel or equipment are located in this area.
c) Personnel must not stand or permit any portion of their body to be directly behind or in front of the launcher
when the tracker and missile are mated.
d) Do not fire the Dragon from within buildings, unless fired IAW FM 90-10-1, or within 50 meters of a vertical
or nearly vertical backstop.
e) MILES training
1) The Dragon missile uses the ATWESS device for a noise simulator.
2) Never arm the ATWESS devices until ready to fire. A severe jolt to the ATWESS may cause the device to
function. Approved single hearing protection is required.
27
7.3 Javelin
The Javelin is a shoulder-launched, man-portable, anti-armor weapon system. It fires a passive imaging infrared
missile with a lock-on before launch guidance system.
7.3.1 Firing conditions
a) Clear the entire SDZ of non-mission essential personnel. Only those personnel specified in the appropriate
FMs and TMs will be permitted in the SDZ before firing any Javelin missile.
b) Javelin missile firing will be accomplished within predetermined boundaries. The RCO must ensure that an
adequate SDZ exits.
c) See applicable FMs and TMs for preparation and firing operations, and Misfire procedures.
7.3.2 Personnel will neither stand nor permit any part of their body to be directly behind or in front of the Javelin
launcher.
7.3.3 Surface Danger Zone: Personnel located in the 100-meter primary danger zone to the rear of the launcher
must wear approved hearing and eye protection.
7.4 References
7.4.1 FM 3-22.34
7.4.2 FM 3-22.37
7.4.3 FM 3-22.1
7.4.4 TM 9-2350-252-10-2
7.4.5 TM 9-1425-484-10
28
Chapter 8
Tank/Fighting Vehicle Gunnery
8.1 General
8.1.1 The only ranges authorized for Tank and BFV main gun firing are as follows:
a) East Range: Automated/computer scored, le XII capable.
b) North Range: Scaled BFV range. Sub-caliber only Tank range (stationary BP’s only).
8.1.2 Submit scenarios to Range Control NLT 90 days in advance (see Appendix H for sample target matrix).
8.1.3 Request for Tank and BFV scenario changes on above ranges must be submitted NLT 72 hours in advance.
8.1.4 Conduct simulation firing on the SCALED Range (located in TA05 south of Ferrell Lake). This range has a
maximum target distance of 1000 meters. The SCALED Range supports Tank/Bradley les I through V with TWGSS
and MILES.
a) The range must be reserved through the Operations Office.
b) Send Target Matrix requests to Automated Target Systems. This range is remote control operated.
c) Units must hand receipt the remote control from ATS.
8.2 Tank/Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) Firing Conditions
8.2.1 Do not fire the Tank/BFV cannon above 5 degrees QE and the following procedures must be employed:
a) Unit master gunners, in conjunction with Range Control Personnel, will ensure that targets are placed at or
less than 5 degrees elevation. Tank/BFV Commanders must ensure that all weapon systems in a firing condition are
pointed toward the impact area at or less than 5 degrees elevation.
b) Do not fire non-stabilized tank armament while the tank is moving.
8.2.2 Handle misfires and malfunctions according to the appropriate TMs for tanks and BFVs.
8.2.3 The OIC and RSO must ensure a range safety briefing is given to crews and range support staff prior to livefire operations. The Briefing must include the following items:
a) Day and Night firing scenarios
b) Right and Left Limits of the range
c) Misfire Procedures
d) Vehicle flag/light procedures
e) Weapon system(s) pointed up and downrange when the vehicle accesses the range
f) Communications between the firing Tank/BFV and the Tower must be maintained at all times
g) The RSO must ensure that the weapon systems are cleared, and on “safe”, before leaving the range
8.2.4 When lasers are in use on a range, the OIC must ensure that:
a) All personnel are thoroughly briefed on safety precautions.
b) Lasers are kept "off" at all times, unless the vehicle has received permission to load weapons.
c) The ballistic doors must be closed when the laser is not in use to prevent accidental firing of the laser.
d) Ballistic doors must be closed before moving the vehicle to the rear of the bore sighting line, or into the
parking area.
e) The use of LRFs equipped with eye safe filters over the emission port is authorized in all Training Areas.
f) Additional information on lasers is found in Chapter 16.
8.2.5 Display a red range flag at the entrance to the range during day fire and a red blinking light during night fire.
8.2.6 Separate the Fuel Point and the Ammunition Transfer Point by a minimum of 300 meters.
8.2.7 Environmental containment materials (spill kits) must be available on all mounted ranges and during
refueling operations.
8.3 M250/257 Smoke Grenade Launchers
8.3.1 Firing conditions
a) SDZ occupation by unprotected personnel in the open is prohibited.
b) Do not fire grenades into strong winds.
c) Personnel in the SDZ must wear personal protective equipment.
d) Clothing must fit snugly to prevent red phosphorous fragments from getting inside ACU/BDUs, particularly
around the neck, ends of sleeves, and pockets.
8.3.2 Personnel are prohibited from occupying the following hazard areas:
a) 125 meters in front and to the sides of the vehicle.
b) 50 meters to the rear of the vehicle.
8.4 Weapons Effect Signature Simulator (Hoffman Device)
Personnel within 25 meters of the Hoffman Device must wear approved hearing and eye protection.
29
8.5 Hazardous Impulse Exposure
8.5.1 The driver’s hatch must be closed at all times during any vehicle operation or weapon system firing of any
kind.
8.5.2 Only personnel wearing approved single hearing protection will be allowed within 200 meters of a tank
during main gun firings.
8.5.3 Non-mission essential personnel will be restricted from areas 10 meters to the sides and from all areas
forward of firing vehicles.
8.6 Firing Vehicle Status Designations
8.6.1 Display flags or lights during daylight and good visibility, on firing vehicles. At night and during reduced
visibility, lights will be displayed.
8.6.2 All weapon systems are considered to be loaded and ready to fire once a firing vehicle begins a battle run and
passes the start fire line.
8.6.3 The vehicle commander will ensure that the weapon systems have been cleared, and that the proper flags, or
lights, are displayed when the firing vehicle completes a battle run.
8.6.4 Vehicle commanders must ensure that the weapon systems are aligned within the envelope of the vehicle’s
width before leaving the range.
8.7 Close Support of Ground Personnel in Live-Fire Exercises
8.7.1 Firing overhead of unprotected personnel by tanks, Bradley fighting vehicles, and the CEV main gun is
prohibited.
8.7.2 Tank, Bradley, M551, and CEV main guns may be used to provide flanking fire if unprotected personnel
remain out of the SD
8.8 Automated Tower Radio Frequencies
8.8.1 NOTE: Per FM 3-20.21 HBCT Gunnery, Jump Radio communications are only required while
performing Gunnery Qualification les. The Crew Evaluators use the Jump Frequency to ensure that proper
commands are given, and proper crew procedures are being followed. Jump Radio usage during any other
type of armor live fire is NOT required.
8.8.2 Refer to MILLER COMPLEX in Appendix A for East, Center, and West Range Radio Frequencies.
8.8.3 SCALED Range Radio Frequencies to be used while utilizing the range:
Scaled Range
1
Admin Frequency
2
Firing Frequency
3
Jump Frequency
40.025
32.050
41.550
8.9 Reference: FM 3-20.21
30
Chapter 9
Mortars
9.1 Firing Conditions
9.1.1 WARNING- Firing mortars over the heads of unprotected troops by Marine Corps units is not
authorized. Firing mortars over the heads of unprotected troops by Army units is not recommended. Mortar
ammunition must be certified for overhead fire of unprotected troops. The installation commander may
approve firing over the heads of unprotected troops with certified overhead fire mortar ammunition on the
basis of acceptable level of risk. Procedural controls to prevent human error (for example, dedicated
observer-controllers with the unprotected troops and firing mortars with dedicated communications) must be
included in the risk management process.
9.1.2 NLT 90 days prior, units must schedule the Training Area that their stationary Firing Points (FPs) and/or
Hip-Shoot missions will be located in, and the Impact Area they will be firing into. This will give Range Control
the time necessary to draw, verify, and approve the Surface Danger Zones (SDZs) for the requested Firing Points.
Information necessary for Range Control to produce SDZ’s for Mortar units are – TFT’s for your weapon system,
Mortar size and Ammo to be fired from the firing point.
a) For Marine Corp Only, mortars must be fired at the edge of the impact area.
b) Practice ammunition, including SRTR, is never fired over the heads of troops, per FM 3-22.90, Appendix B,
Safety, page B-13.
c) If Mortars are firing as part of a CALFEX or LFX, the SDZ must not encroach on the position(s) of
unprotected troops, regardless of what type of ammunition is being fired.
9.1.3 All Mortar rounds fired must fall within the Impact Area, and must be observed.
9.1.4 When conducting indirect fire missions, the OP must be in the “Open” status with Range Control before the
firing position will be allowed to “Open”.
9.1.5 The Mortar Fire Direction Center (FDC) must have the firing position(s) safety limits entered on a Safety
Diagram, Safety “T”, and on a plotting board map or on the computer showing the mortar sections impact box and
mortar position. The impact of the rounds must be plotted as they are called in by the Forward Observers (FO), so
that the FDC can insure that the target grid is in the impact area and follow up rounds are tracked to ensure each
round lands in the Impact Area. A Safety T at each mortar track or mortar piece location.
9.1.6 Refer to FM 3-22.90, Chapter 1, Section III for additional Mortar Safety Procedures.
9.1.7 Use the following guidelines when firing mortars:
a) All Mortars must be within 100 meters of the surveyed firing point grid. Reference FM 3-22.90, page 1-6,
paragraph 1-31.
b) Any projectile that bursts or lands outside the safety limits, as prescribed by RC Form 16B and the RMTK
created SDZ, or any unobserved rounds, requires immediate action and investigation as outlined below, to determine
the cause.
1) Cease-Fire-Freeze the Firing Point IMMEDIATELY.
2) Immediately report the incident to Range Control using the Range Accident/Incident Checklist (see
Appendix C).
3) Immediately Cease Fire all units, until the responsible unit is identified.
4) Do not change any settings on, or modify the position of, the mortar until Range Control has completed the
investigation.
c) Propellant increments removed from the rounds before firing will be placed in a metal or wood container
located outside the firing vehicle, or 25 meters away from a dismounted Mortar.
d) Replace all safety wires and increments on rounds not used.
e) All personnel who take part in mortar firing must wear a Kevlar/ACH, IBA/IOTV and single hearing
protection. Double hearing protection must be worn if firing the 120mm Mortar from a carrier. Personnel
outside the carrier, within 200 meters, must wear single hearing protection.
f) Every mortar tube will have some form of visible safety stakes or marks/markers to indicate the right and left
limits of fire. Exception to the rule is the MFCS 120mm Mortars with the mounted GPS computer tracking system,
which tracks and verifies safety limits with its internal system.
9.1.8 Excess increments must be burned as soon as possible, and will not be transported from one firing position to
another.
a) Increments will be arranged IAW appropriate FM and TC for burning.
b) All personnel, vehicles, or weapons shall maintain a minimum distance of 200 meters from the burning area,
and a minimum of 1,200 meters from Camp Ripley boundaries when burning excess increments.
31
c) The size of the burning team will be sufficient to serve as road guards, arrange increments, and fight fires that
may start.
d) The team must carry a sufficient quantity of water (10 gallons minimum) and shovels.
e) Aiming circles used on the mortar firing point must be declineated for the north or south impact areas, dated,
initialed, and correction factors.
9.1.9 WARNING - Do not transport rounds without safety pins installed.
9.2 Mortar Fire Control System (MFCS) Gunnery
9.2.1 Before firing, the PLT SGT/LDR must verify with a dagger the position and direction of fire for each Mortar,
every time they enter a new firing position.
9.2.2 In the event of computer failure, place Firing Point in CHECKFIRE, and then notify the FDC and Range
Control immediately. Begin degraded-mode gunnery procedures.
9.2.3 Follow all firing procedures outlined in FM 3-22.90, FM 3-22.91, and TM 9-1220-248-10.
9.2.4 These manuals must be on site for referencing during all types of mortar firing:
a) AR 385-63 or DA PAM 385-63
b) TM 43-0001-28(or the relevant data sheets from the TM for the ammo being used on the site)
c) FM 3-22.90 Mortars
d) TFT for all Mortar types on site
e) TC for FDC Computer system
f) TM for weapon system
g) AIN’s (Ammunition information notifications from POST ASP)
h) Signed Deliberate Risk Assessment Worksheet
9.3 HIP-Shoot Fire Missions
9.3.1 Units must submit a Hip-Shoot Mission OPLAN and risk management worksheet NLT 90 days prior to
Range Control for review and approval.
9.3.2 Hip-Shoot missions are only authorized along the impact area boundary roads only.
9.3.3 Reference FM 7-90, Appendix F Hip-Shoot Missions, page F-3 for further details.
9.4 Surface Danger Zones:
9.4.1 The Mortar firing position will give the following information in the RC Form 16B-Mortar Range
Opening/Closing Checklist to Range Control:
a) Training Area and Firing Position Grid Coordinates (8-digit minimum)
b) Maximum Left Azimuth
c) Maximum Right Azimuth
d) Maximum Range
e) Minimum Range
f) SDZ being used (include) – date on SDZ, weapon type, ammo type, fuzes, charge/charges, and authorizing
signature.
9.4.2 The Fire Desk Operator then calls Miller Army Airfield to request the opening of an Air Advisory Block.
9.4.3 When all safety criteria are met, the Fire Desk Operator will “Open” the Mortar position.
9.5 References:
9.5.1 FM 3-22.90
9.5.2 FM 3-22.91
9.5.3 FM 7-90
9.5.4 TM 43-0001-28
9.5.5 TM 9-1220-248-10
9.5.6 CRTC Range Regulation (1.17 )
9.5.7 CRTC Range Regulation (Declination Stations Appendix I)
32
Chapter 10
Artillery
10.1 Firing Conditions – General Requirements
10.1.1 An accurate artillery survey system must be used at all firing points for grid location/laying of firing
systems and a different survey system for checking/verification of the Artillery system, i.e., GLPS, PADS, DAGR,
Aiming Circles, etc., prior to firing FM 3-09.8 Chapter 2 Safety.
10.1.2 The M67 GLPS can be used in conjunction with the M2A2 Aiming Circle and the Positioning and Azimuth
Determining System (PADS).
10.1.3 Camp Ripley has various locations with large deposits of minerals that affect the use of magnetic directionfinding equipment.
10.1.4 Rocket Assisted Projectiles (RAP) are authorized for fire but RMTK will be used and coordination with
Range Control will be done 90 days prior to firing.
10.1.5 WARNING – Large base fragments weighing 2-3 pounds can travel back up-range as far as 2400
meters from the point of impact to the firing position. This risk is applicable to all M107 rounds.
Commanders may adjust surface danger zones and/or location of observers to compensate for the possibility
of incoming base fragments, or ensure that observers are in protective cover during fire missions. (Reference
AIN 118-05, dated 13 OCT 2005, for further information) Compound B type HE M107 rounds are not
impacted
10.1.6 NOTE: Range Control has the list of surveyed safety points (ORSTA to EOL) that are available to
validate magnetic direction with survey.
10.1.7 NOTE: Firing will cease when visibility is less than 1/2 mile, unless radar is available.
10.2 Field Artillery Cannon – General Requirements
10.2.1 The Camp Ripley Post Commander has approved the use of E-7s as a Range OIC.
10.2.2 The minimum QE for 105mm and 155mm indirect fire is 267 mils.
10.2.3 All Artillery rounds fired must be observed.
10.2.4 Any projectile that bursts or lands outside safety limits, or any unobserved rounds, will require immediate
action and investigation, as outlined below to determine the cause.
a) Immediately, report the incident to Range Control using the Range Incident Checklist
(see Appendix C).
b) Immediately, suspend firing of all FA units until the responsible unit is identified.
10.2.5 Maintain continuous communication with Range Control on SINCGARS primary frequency 36.100, or
alternate frequency 36.900.
10.2.6 The OP must be in the “Open” status with Range Control, before the firing position will be given an
“Open” status.
10.2.7 All projectiles fired during training will be fuzed with bore-safe fuzes. Firing projectiles without fuzes is
strictly prohibited.
10.2.8 Locate all weapons within a 200-meter radius of the firing point grid.
10.2.9 NOTE: Place safety stakes, tape, or physical constraints/marks on all towed cannon weapons to
insure safety computer system for tracking rounds during firing missions.
10.2.10 The boundary of the Impact Area must be drawn on the FDC firing chart or have it on your FDC computer
system for tracking rounds during firing missions.
10.2.11 The following manuals (hard copy) must be present, and their usage understood, by the OIC and RSO at
the battery location:
a) FM 6-50
b) FM 6-40/MCWP 3-1.6.19
c) TC/TM for FDC computer system
d) FM 3-09.8
e) TM for the weapon system
f) DA PAM 385-63 or AR 385-63/MCO P3570.1B
g) TM 43-0001-28 or at a minimum the pages covering the ammo on the firing point
h) TM for weapon system
33
i) AIN’s (Ammunition information notifications from POST ASP)
10.2.12 Overhead firing - The OIC of a firing point or range must insure proper precautions when firing any fuzes
during inclement weather (see TM 43-0001-28)
10.2.13 Powder burning
a) Units must burn excess powder increments prior to moving to a new firing position.
b) An E-7 or above must supervise the burning of excess powder.
c) All personnel, vehicles, or weapons shall maintain a minimum distance of 200 meters from the burning area,
and a minimum of 1,200 meters from Camp Ripley boundaries when burning excess powder bags.
d) Powder will be arranged IAW appropriate FM and TC for burning.
e) The size of the powder burning team must be sufficient to serve as road guards, arrange powder bags, and
fight fires that may start. The team must carry a minimum of 10 gallons of water, and shovels as necessary.
10.3 Field Artillery Cannon Surface Danger Zone
10.3.1 Road guards, with communications to the FDC, must be posted on all major roads passing through area E of
the firing battery. Area E for Camp Ripley is as follows: 300 m for 105mm, 350 m for 155mm.
10.3.2 Batteries are responsible for ensuring safety requirements compliance regarding Area E.
10.3.3 Artillery units occupy and open firing positions with Range Control utilizing the following procedures:
a) Firing Battery advance party personnel must implement normal procedures to place weapon systems in
locations to support the mission.
b) The BC or Gunnery Sergeant must use an accurate system to locate an 8 digit grid to be used as the center of
battery grid to insure all guns are positioned with 200 meters of this point.
c) The BC or Gunnery Sergeant will then contact Range Control to submit the FP Grid and the designated
Impact Area. This should be done immediately, to give Range Control the time to compute SDZ data.
10.3.4 RESTRICTIONS ON FIRING WHITE PHOSPHORUS: Firing of White Phosphorus is prohibited in
sensitive wetland areas within the Leach and Hendrickson Impact Areas.
a) Do not fire White Phosphorus will not be fired directly into, or within 100 meters of, or have airburst directly
over, wetland areas. The sensitive areas, including the 100-meter buffer zone, are identified on a map at Range
Control.
10.4 NON-Established Firing Point Program
10.4.1 This program allows artillery units to occupy any location within a designated training area without regard
to established firing points. The program is designed to exercise the command and control elements within artillery
units. This increases realism to exercise the command and control elements within artillery units and by providing
maximum availability of tactical firing points without loss of safety.
10.4.2 Artillery units must coordinate use with affected maneuver units prior to occupation of firing points.
Maneuver and artillery units, prior to AT or IDT periods, will agree upon terrain utilization. The unit must
coordinate with Range Control NLT 72 hours in advance for the training area and time period, for the execution of
the program.
10.4.3 Hendrickson Impact Non-Established (HINE)
a) Training Areas authorized for use with the HINE program are: 1(west of grid line 9330), 2(north of grid line
06),4 and 5(east of the 9020 grid line, with the left limit no less than 6376 mil in azimuth); 8, 9, 10(west of grid line
9330), 15, 17 thru 25, 29 thru 33, 35, 37 thru 45, 48, 50 thru 55, 68 thru 71, and 79, south of grid line 30.
b) Each firing position must have a firing chart or map with the HINE target area plotted. Boundaries for the
HINE program are from grid UM 89981689, draw a circle with a radius of 1000 meters. All tabulated safety data
must remain in this designated circle. For the maximum illumination canister to impact range draw a circle
with a radius of 1400 meters from grid UM 89981689. All illumination canisters must fall within this designated
range.
c) NO MACS Charge 4H allowed. When firing MACS Charge 3 High Angle missions, units MUST stay
BELOW 26,000 feet Maximum Airspace Restriction. The unit must secure and ensure that no personnel are within
Area E (350 meters for 155mm and 300 meters for 105mm) by use of barriers or blocking off roads and trails with
vehicles. Guard must have commo with firing battery if manning of these barriers is required.
d) OP-1 and OP-2 are the Observation Posts for the HINE Program.
10.4.4 Leach Impact Non-Established (LINE)
a) Training Areas authorized for use with the LINE Program are 18 thru 23, 36 Lake Alott area only, 40 thru 45,
49, 50, 54 thru 59, 61 thru 64, 68 thru 71, and 79 (below grid line 30.
b) Each firing position must have a firing chart or map with the LINE target area plotted. Boundaries for the
LINE program are from grid UM 92282527, draw a circle with a radius of 760 meters. All tabulated safety data
34
must remain in the designated circle. For maximum illumination to canister impact range draw a circle with a radius
of 1400 meters from grid UM 92282527. All illumination canisters must fall within this designated range.
c) NO MACS Charge 4H allowed. When firing MACS Charge 3 High Angle missions, units MUST stay
BELOW 26,000 feet Maximum Airspace Restriction. The unit must secure and ensure that no personnel are within
Area E (350 meters for 155mm and 300 meters for 105mm) by use of barriers or blocking off roads and trails with
vehicles. If manning of these barriers is required, guard must have commo with firing battery
d) OP-15, OP-16, and OP-19 are the Observation Posts for the LINE Program. OP-23 is not authorized to be
used for the LINE Program, and no one will occupy OP-23 while the LINE Program is being utilized.
10.4.5 All tabulated safety data must remain in the designated safety box.
10.4.6 All weapons must be located within a 200-meter radius of the firing point grid.
10.4.7 Batteries must be cleared to fire after they have verified their safety data with the battalion FDC, and
transmitted their opening data, using the Range Opening/Closing Checklist to Range Control.
10.4.8 Maintain continuous Communication with Range Control on primary frequency FM 36.100, or alternate
frequency FM 36.900.
10.4.9 Batteries are responsible for ensuring safety requirements regarding Area E are complied with, per
paragraph 10.3.
10.4.10 For more information concerning the HINE and LINE programs contact Range Control at (320) 6163137/3134.
10.5 Direct Fire Safety
10.5.1 Field Artillery may be fired in the direct mode from the J Range, into Hendrickson Impact Area only.
Maximum Charge is 3 Green Bag or 1L.
10.5.2 Minimum target engagements are as follows:
a) 105mm - 1100 meters
b) 155mm - 1100 meters
10.5.3 Any projectile that bursts or lands outside safety limits, or any unobserved rounds, will require immediate
action and investigation, as outlined below to determine the cause.
a) Immediately, report the incident to Range Control using the Range Incident Checklist
(see Appendix C).
b) Immediately, suspend firing of all FA units until the responsible unit is identified.
10.5.4 Maintain continuous communication with Range Control on SINCGARS primary frequency 36.100, or
alternate frequency 36.900.
10.6 Paladin and all Towed Howitzers
Reference and follow FM 3-09.8, Chapter 2, paragraph 2-18.a., page 2-52 for Paladin Firing Safety information.
10.6.1 PADS, IPADS, or 2 secure PLGRS will be used to obtain center of battery for paladin use at each firing
position prior to firing.
10.6.2 Paladin units may travel with fuzed ammunition (only HE/PD) when the onboard fire extinguisher system is
operational.
10.6.3 Properly secure all ammunition prior to transporting.
10.6.4 All howitzers within the 750m goose egg must have a safety present prior to firing and updated after
moving within the goose egg, per FM 3-09.8.
10.7 Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS)
10.7.1 Requirements/Procedures for Live-Fire
a) General firing conditions
1) Only M28A1 Reduced Range Practice Rocket (RRPR) can be fired on Camp Ripley, due to the size of the
installation and the impact areas.
2) The RRPR is not certified for overhead fire. Clear all non-mission essential personnel from the entire SDZ.
3) Area F is the area immediately to the rear of the launcher directly exposed to blast overpressure, fragments,
and debris from rocket launcher. Area F extends 350 m on each side of the launcher, and 400 m to the rear of the
launcher. Personnel are prohibited from occupying Area F during firing. A noise hazard area extends an additional
500 m past Area F and may only be occupied by mission essential personnel wearing approved hearing protection.
b) MLRS Firing Points
1) Hendrickson Impact Area center mass grid is UM 90201654.
2) Leach Impact Area center mass grid is UM 91822529.
3) Camp Ripley Maximum Quadrant Elevation (Max QE) is 26,000 feet MSL.
35
4) For the OPAREA Method of Computing Safety, there are four established Operation Areas on Camp
Ripley: #1-West, #2-Center, #3-East, and #4-Arno. Surface Danger Zone Overlays and SDZ Information Cards are
available at Range Control. (See Range Control for updated and changed SDZ’s)
5) For the Firing Point Method of Computing Safety, the firing position will give Range Control the following
information in the Range Opening/Closing Checklist:
6) The Firing Point Grid Coordinate (8-digit minimum)
7) Center Mass of the Targets Grid Coordinate (8-digit minimum)
8) The Fire Desk Operator will then enter these coordinates into the Range Mangers Tool Kit (RMTK) SDZ
Tool.
9) Once the SDZ Tool creates the SDZ, the Fire Desk Operator will ensure that the SDZ falls within the Impact
Area boundaries.
10) The Fire Desk Operator then calls Miller Army Airfield to request the opening of an Air Advisory Block.
11) The Fire Desk Operator will “Open” the firing position what all safety criteria are met.
c) Administrative (Unit Responsibility)
1) Provide sufficient detail personnel to serve as a fire fighting team. The team will have an NCOIC, vehicle
with radio, and sufficient firefighting equipment (to include 5 gallon water cans).
2) Provide visual observers positioned to verify warhead event/impact, with binoculars, and a vehicle with
operational radio. They will monitor the designated radio net. Observers must be trained by the unit to determine
warhead event/impact location. The observers must have a Camp Ripley map, with a safety overlay.
3) Coordinate with Range Control for Reduced Range Practice Rocket (RRPR) road guard and firefighting
equipment requirements and support.
d) Observation of Rounds
1) Radar will be used, in conjunction with forward observers, when visual observation is limited/restricted.
Interval between rockets for multiple round missions will not be less than 30 seconds (if only radar is used).
2) Rockets not observed, or observed out of safe, must be reported immediately to Range Control. The unit
will place itself in cease-fire-freeze, pending a determination of the problem resulting in the unobserved, or out of
safe, rocket.
10.8 References:
10.8.1 FM 3-09.60
10.8.2 FM 3-09.70
10.8.3 FM 3-09.8
10.8.4 FM 6-30
10.8.5 FM 6-40 with Change 1
10.8.6 FM 6-50
10.8.7 FM 6-60
10.8.8 USAFAS White Paper, dated 04 DEC 2000
10.8.9 USAFAS White Paper, dated 23 FEB 2001
10.8.10 CRTC Range Regulation (1.17 )
10.8.11 CRTC Range Regulation (Declination Stations Appendix I)
36
Chapter 11
Aviation Range Safety
11.1 General Information
11.1.1 Aircrew Requirements
a) All aircrew operating within Camp Ripley’s range/training airspace complex shall participate in a range
safety brief within 90 days and understand installation range regulations prior to operating with the complex.
b) Aircrews shall take all measures necessary to ensure they conduct training within assigned SUA or other
authorized operating areas and that all effects are contained within range complex boundaries.
11.1.2 Scheduling
a) All aviation operations conducted within a range/SUA are scheduled with the scheduling activity.
b) SUA is scheduled via the Range Facility Management Support System when available and designated /
activated in accordance with paragraph 2.4 of this regulation for all air-to-ground operations.
11.1.3 Communications
a) Maintain two-way communication between the OIC/DZO and the installation Range Control Office.
b) Range control must be able to maintain radio contact with all aircraft operating on the range. Communication
relays are authorized as long as the RCO has a method (for example, tunable radio) to contact aircraft immediately
in the event of an imminent situation.
c) All aircraft utilizing ranges monitor the guard frequency. Range Control will have the capability to
transmit/receive on the Guard frequency (121.5 VHF/243.0 UHF).
11.1.4 Weather
a) All aviation training is conducted in visual meteorological conditions (VMC) unless otherwise approved by
the OIC and coordinated with Range Control.
b) The local weather detachment or command post must advise the OIC/RCO of any sudden adverse weather
changes (watches, warnings, or advisories) that might impact range operations or safety.
c) The OIC monitors weather conditions (such as altimeter, wind direction/velocity, and ceiling) and provide
general safety and weather updates during range operations as required.
11.1.5 Paradrops.
a) Survey the DZ 24 hours prior to use.
b) Paradrop aircrew and DZ personnel shall maintain communications with Range Control.
c) DZs are confirmed clear before commencement of parachute or paradrop operations.
d) Joint Precision Airdrop System (JPADS).
1) The unit dropping the load is responsible for using JPADS mission planning software before they fly the
mission.
2) Range Control approves Improved-Container Delivery System deliveries only if the Precision Airdrop
System-Mission Planner derived point of impact, the 3–sigma footprint for chute failure, and the guidance failure
footprint overlay on government owned, leased, or otherwise controlled land with no unauthorized personnel present
and a collateral damage estimate acceple to the RCO.
3) Equipment, facilities and participating personnel are permitted within the 3–sigma success, chute failure,
and the guidance failure footprints as long as range management has conducted and approved an operational risk
assessment.
4) JPADS users may desire to update weather observations by dropping a sonde (foot long metal wind sensor)
for wind updates in order to revise footprint analyses up until the time of delivery.
11.1.6 Countermeasures
a) The use of chaff/flares will comply with local range regulations/SOPs, FAA requirements, and in accordance
with aircraft TMs.
11.2 Firing Conditions
11.2.1 General Requirements
a) Pilots and gunners are familiar with the impact area, firing limits, and safety regulations for the range on
which they will fire.
b) The firing aircraft pilot in command ensures that firing aircraft are properly oriented with the target and are
safe to fire.
c) For UAS operations: The mission commander maintains the responsibility for the safe operation of payload
or platform.
d) All live-fire training must be observed.
11.2.2 Armament Safety Procedures
37
a) Aircraft weapon systems are loaded or unloaded only in approved areas. Selection of these areas will ensure
total containment in the event of accidental discharge. The weapon systems dispersion angle and maximum range
are considered if natural or manmade barriers are not used.
1) X-5 Landing Zone is the only authorized loading spot for rotary wing (RW) door gunnery on Leach Impact
Area
2) Airspace routing used by RW aircraft flying from the ammunition loading site to and from the firing range
are plotted on a map or chart and maintained by both the using unit and the installation Range Control Office. This
course is selected so that accidental firing at any point on the course will minimize risk to life and property.
However, aircraft weapon systems must be maintained in a safe condition until within the range boundary.
Reference when utilizing FARP operations and flying to the range and established plotted map or chart will be
maintained.
3) When training requirements dictate, commanders (battalion, squadron, or higher) direct the loading and
unloading of ammunition from aircraft while the engines are running. Such operations are authorized when a
thorough risk assessment has been conducted, control measures implemented and residual risks identified and
accepted by the appropriate commander.
4) A dry pass or range sweep for the entire range, focusing on the target area, must be conducted to ensure
personnel are clear from hazardous effects.
5) RW aircraft are in a safe condition prior to departing an aerial firing point unless otherwise directed.
6) The pilot in command of the RW aircraft must ensure that all weapon systems are clear of ammunition prior
to departing the range. Upon completion of training, aircraft weapons systems will be safed in accordance with
aircraft TMS before leaving the range.
8) Crash rescue personnel are knowledgeable of safety precautions associated with hazards associated with
burned aircraft. Camp Ripley Fire is the designated Crash and Rescue for aircraft on CRTC.
11.2.3 Fuel spill materials (spill kits) must be available at forward arming and refueling points. Fuel tankers used
to refuel aircraft must be equipped with sufficient absorbent material to handle small to moderate spills.
11.2.4 Commanders develop and implement an aggressive program to ensure crew coordination and combat
identification procedures concurrent with the gunnery-training program. For the Army, combat identification
training will be conducted in accordance with TC 25-8, TC 3-04.11, TC 3-04.35, TC 3-04.140, and appropriate air
crew training manuals.
11.2.4 Specific Requirements
a) Running fire. When conducting running fires, cockpit displayed graphics, ground markers, or prominent
terrain will be used to mark start and cease fire lines.
b) Hover fire. When conducting hover fire, the firing position will be marked. If possible, hover fire should be
conducted over level/improved terrain. Natural or manmade features are used to aid in the establishment of range
boundaries and control measures.
11.2.5 Rotary wing/tilt rotor door gunnery operations.
a) Conduct door gunnery operations according to the appropriate gunnery manuals (FM 3-04.140 for the Army).
b) All personnel on the aircraft must wear at a minimum, single-hearing protection when firing weapons.
11.3 Unmanned Aircraft Systems Considerations
11.3.1 Operator/Air mission commander requirements.
a) All operators who control unmanned aircraft systems (UAS) platforms/payloads within range complex
training airspace participate in a range safety brief and become familiar with installation range regulations prior to
operating within the complex.
b) Air mission commanders who oversee UAS operations/training within range complex training airspace
participate in a range safety brief and become familiar with installation range regulations prior to conducting
operations within the complex.
c) Air mission commanders takes all measures necessary to ensure training/operations are conducted within
assigned SUA or other authorized operating area and that unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs) and all effects (for
example, munitions/laser) are contained within assigned boundaries.
d) UAS operational unit commanders ensure that all UAS performance, air worthiness and related requirements
meet system safety standards prior to operating UAVs within assigned range space.
11.3.2 Operator qualifications for platform/payload operations, aviation weapons delivery/terminal guidance.
a) Army
1) Operators successfully complete an approved qualification course, or qualification, or transition training in
accordance with an approved program of instruction.
2) Operators demonstrate platform, payload, and weapon systems proficiency in accordance with TC 1–600
and FM 3–04.140.
38
b) Marine Corps: Marine operators must demonstrate proficiency in accordance with the appropriate TMS T&R
manual.
11.3.3 Fielded systems.
a) Ensure Range Control Facility Personnel are familiar with the flight characteristics of UAS involved in range
aviation operations.
b) Ensure all UAS operations are scheduled and approved by Range Control. Include the coordination radio
frequencies, loss of contact procedures, climb/descent corridors, operating altitudes, and proximity to other aircraft
and personnel.
c) UAS operators maintain radio contact with Range Control or the OIC at all times.
d) Unless accomplished during initial coordination, request and receive clearance from range control or control
agency personnel before changing UAS assigned position, altitude, or route. If UAS loses uplink for a short period
of time, the aircraft automatically execute return home procedures so that the uplink can be reacquired.
e) For ordnance delivery, operate UAS in visual meteorological conditions (VMC) and when the weather is
forecast to remain VMC throughout the flight.
f) Arm ordnance for delivery only when the aircraft is within the SUA and in a position from which, if released,
the ordnance remain within the designated impact area if operating with weapons.
g) The UAS operator notifies Range Control/OIC when the UAS has completed ordnance delivery and when
departing the range.
h) The mission commander maintains the responsibility for the safe operation of payload and platform.
11.3.4 Developmental/Experimental UAS Systems. If the UAS has not yet been fielded, provide Range Control
facility personnel current reliability information and a “worst case” depiction of potential range, direction and SUA
point of departure for developmental/experimental UAS in the event that loss of contact procedures fail.
11.3.5 UAS Operations Conducted Outside Restricted Areas and Warning Areas. UAS operations conducted
outside restricted areas and/or warning areas comply with the provision of FAA O 7610.4 and MOA Concerning the
Operation of DOD UAS in the NAS dated 24 Sep 07.
11.3.6 Note: Firing is suspended immediately upon loss of communications with Range Control, the OIC, or
firing
11.3.7 NOTE: Ensure that while operating SUAS/UAS you refer to the Camp Ripley Tactical Training
Center SUAS/UAS Standard Operating Procedures.
39
Chapter 12
Air Defense Artillery Weapon Systems
12.1 General Information
None of the current ADA weapon systems are authorized for live fire due to the size of the Camp Ripley
Installation. The M3P .50 Cal. Machine Gun may be fired from the Avenger.
12.2 Air Defense Radio Controlled Miniature Aerial Target (RCMAT)
12.2.1 Use of RCMATs must be requested on ATS Form 23. CommandersO-5 (O-4P) and above, will submit a
Safety Memorandum (see Appendix H for sample document), listing those individuals who have been trained and
tested on the operation of RCMATs. Operators must attend a Range Control Safety Briefing prior to range
operations.
12.2.2 RCMATs will not be flown over troops, or within 200 meters of the Camp Ripley boundaries. All
RCMATs will be grounded immediately, if aircraft are observed in the area.
12.2.3 All precautions in TM 9-1550-416-10/14 will be followed. Range Control will coordinate with Miller
Army Airfield during RCMATs training.
12.2.4 Use of RCMATs in the Cantonment Area will be coordinated through the Camp Ripley Operations Office,
as well as Camp Ripley Security, NLT 14 days in advance.
12.3 Reference: FM 44-18-1
40
Chapter 13
Chemical Agents, Smoke, and Aircraft Spray
13.1 General
13.1.1 NOTE: Red smoke and Red Star Clusters are only used for EMERGENCIES.
13.1.2 C Range is the authorized NBC Course/Gas Chamber.
13.1.3 The OIC and RSO must meet rank/grade requirements of Table 1-1 Appendix I of this regulation.
13.1.4 Operational requirements:
a) The range must have two forms of communications to open and close the range with Range Control.
b) Hourly communication checks are not required, but the site must monitor Range Control SINCGARS primary
frequency 36.100, or alternate frequency 36.900, during smoke and chemical agent operations.
c) Medical support is required on site. Units using the C Range may utilize medical support assets from other AComplex facilities, provided communications are in place.
13.1.5 Personnel must carry their protective masks in training when using:
a) Fog oil
b) HC (Hexachloroethane zinc). HC smoke can kill if improperly used. This smoke contains corrosive
substances that can destroy lung tissue, causing the lungs to fill with fluid in a condition known as “Dry-Land
Drowning.” In some cases, the body can also be poisoned by zinc metal oxide in the smoke. The problem
symptomatic effects are usually delayed. Soldiers do not realize they inhaled too much until hours, or even days,
after the exposure.
c) RP (Red Phosphorous)
d) WP (White Phosphorous)
e) Colored and diesel smokes
f) All Riot Control agents
13.1.6 Personnel must utilize their protective masks:
a) Before exposure to any concentration of smoke from M8 white smoke grenades or HC smoke pots.
b) When operating in smoke that has a visibility less than 50 meters.
c) When operating in a smoke haze with visibility greater than 50 meters for over 4 hours.
d) For smoke generator operator personnel when it is impossible to stay up-wind of the smoke.
e) When using smoke in MOUT training, HC smoke will not be used anywhere within the MOUT site, or any
enclosed areas such as buildings, trenches, vehicles, etc.
13.2 Riot Control Agents
13.2.1 The use of riot control agents and smoke operations on Camp Ripley must be coordinated with Range
Control NLT 30 days in advance. Required information is:
a) Type of agent or smoke to be used
b) Proposed location of exercise
c) Quantity to be used
d) Duration of use
e) Date and time of usage
13.2.2 Personnel must be evaluated by unit medical personnel, prior to being exposed to riot control agents, to
ensure they are free of the following health conditions:
a) Respiratory ailments
b) Active dermatitis, to include severe facial acne
c) Pregnancy
13.2.3 Authorized riot control agents on Camp Ripley are:
a) CS
b) CSX
c) CS-1
d) CS-2
e) CR
13.2.4 NOTE: Only CS in capsule form may be used in the CS Chamber. NO EXCEPTIONS!
41
13.2.5 Only chemical qualified Soldiers may supervise the use of riot control agents. Officers are considered
chemical qualified if they possess AOC 74A or SSI 3R. Enlisted Soldiers are considered chemical qualified if they
possess MOS 54B or SQI C.
13.2.6 Riot Control agents will not be used under conditions that are dangerous to life or property. The use of riot
control agents is limited to 1200 meters from Camp Ripley boundaries, 500 meters from the nearest heavily traveled
road, and 1200 meters from the Cantonment Area, Ammunition Supply Point, and Miller Army Airfield.
13.2.7 Unprotected personnel will not be exposed to riot control agents for no longer than 15 seconds.
13.2.8 Reduce the MOPP level under high heat stress conditions whenever possible.
13.3 Smoke
The use of smoke in training poses special health and safety issues. See paragraph 13.1 of this regulation for safety
precautions.
13.3.1 Soldiers involved in FTXs using smoke must receive a Safety Briefing concerning the use of smoke from
their chain of command.
13.3.2 CS and HC hand grenades will not be fired closer than 30 meters from personnel, or used in confined
spaces such as tents, vehicles, buildings, and occupied tunnels.
13.3.3 FS (sulfur trioxide-chlorosulfonic acid solution) and FM (titanium tetrachloride) smoke will not be used in
training.
13.3.4 NOTE: Do not detonate a smoke grenade closer than 1200 meters from Camp Ripley boundaries,
public roads, or other restricted areas, as determined by the RCO.
13.4 Smoke Pots
13.4.1 Submit request for the use of smoke generators and smoke pots to Range Control NLT 48 hours in
advance. Requests must include location, duration of smoke, and dispersion pattern.
13.4.2 M-5 Smoke pots must:
a) Be maintained and kept dry prior to use.
b) Not be fired inside any enclosed or poorly ventilated area.
c) Have glasses or eye protection in use when igniting.
d) Be 5 meters from friendly troops.
e) Have 30 meters of WD-1/TT wire when being electrically fired.
13.4.3 Danger: To prevent facial burns, never allows the firers face over the top of the smoke pot while
igniting the striker.
13.4.4 Select an area free from ignitable material to eliminate the possibility of range fires when using smoke
pots
13.4.5 Do not use smoke pots or smoke generators within 1200 meters of the ASP, Cantonment Area, Miller
Army Airfield, public highways, or the Camp Ripley boundaries.
13.5 Aircraft Spray
Aerial disbursement of chemical training agents will be considered on a case-by-case basis, with coordination
through the Range Control Office. The chemical OIC must submit the request NLT 30 days in advance. Requests
must include the following items:
13.5.1 Grid Location
13.5.2 Type of chemical agent
13.5.3 Type of aircraft used for disbursement
13.5.4 Altitude of disbursement
13.5.5 Duration of each disbursement
13.5.6 Amount of agent to be disbursed
13.5.7 SOPs covering all contingencies and safety procedures
13.5.8 Deliberate Risk Assessment Worksheet (DD Form 2977)
13.6 References:
13.6.1 FM 3-11.11
13.6.2 FM 3-11.22
13.6.3 FM 3-50
13.6.4 FM 3-101-1
42
Chapter 14
Non-Lethal Weapons
14.1 Definition
Department of Defense Directive (DODD) 3000.3 defines non-lethal weapons (NLW) as "weapons that are
explicitly designed and primarily employed so as to incapacitate personnel or materiel while minimizing fatalities,
permanent injury to personnel, and undesired damage to property and the environment." Furthermore, “unlike
conventional lethal weapons that destroy their targets principally through blast, penetration, and fragmentation,
NLW employ means other than gross physical destruction to prevent the target from functioning. NLW are intended
to have relatively reversible effects on personnel and materiel."
14.2 General
14.2.1 NOTE: The use of NLW/Less-Lethal Weapons are required to use the Range Control
BLANKS/SIMUNITIONS/LESS-LETHAL RANGES OPENING/CLOSING CHECKLIST.
14.2.2 The term "non-lethal" does not mean zero mortality or nonpermanent damage. Fatal injuries can occur if
munitions are employed at a distance that is less than the determined minimum safe engagement range.
14.2.3 The Inter-Service Non-Lethal Individual Weapons Instructors Course is the only course in the Department
of Defense that is certified to produce instructors who will train individuals in the proper employment of NLWs.
14.2.4 Purpose: This outline provides a base plan for range operations and range safety from which commanders
can design safe realistic training that meets the needs of their subordinate units for conducting Less-Lethal Weapons
Training.
14.2.5 Less-Lethal Weapons Concept of Training
a) To train units from the individual level up to the commands level on the usage and employment of Less-Lethal
technology both in civil disturbance and combat operations.
b) This training is based on doctrine, tactics, techniques, and procedures. It does not replace a commander’s
lethal capability. The use of Less-Lethal adds to the number of options a commander can use. It gives a course of
action when the use of lethal force may not be the best call for the situation.
14.2.6 Safety Considerations:
a) Less-Lethal Weapons are non-lethal by design and intent only. Failure to adhere to the Minimum Safe
Distance (MSD) will result in serious bodily injury or DEATH!
b) All troops on the firing line must wear eye & ear protection, as well as helmet and IBA.
c) Lethal ammo and Less-Lethal ammo will be stored separately.
d) Never point a laser (Class 2 or Higher) at anyone’s face for more than 5 seconds.
e) Troops training with EMDs (X26 & X26E Taser) are not authorized to take a live stun from an EMD. It is
prohibited to use on US Soldiers by the Dept. of the Army.
f) OC spray training must be done by strict DOD standard using an INIWIC instructor. OC spray training will
not be done inside of a building or enclosed structure.
g) The LRAD must be approved through Range Control NLT 90 days prior to us
14.2.7 Authorized Weapons:
M320
Authorized Weapons
Ammunition
40mm NLWM
FN 303 Cal.
.68 Cal. Projectile
VADs
Wave Technology
Light Technology
Acoustic Technology
X26/X26 E (EMD)
OC Spray
Shotgun 12 gage
Multi Launchers
VMS
M315
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Air Cartridge
Inert / live
12 GA. NLWM
40MM
M5 MCCM
Air Cartridge
43
# of Rounds
Per training requirements
Per training requirements (the use of the Ca.
permanent paint and OC round are prohibited)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Per training requirements
Per training requirements
Per training requirements
Per training requirements
Per training requirements
Per training requirements
14.2.8 Authorized Munitions:
Less-Lethal Munitions
Minimum Safe Distance
12 GA. Beanbag (USMC) AA29
30m
12 GA. M1021 Fin Stabilized (ARMY)
AA51
10m
12 GA. Fin Stabilized (USMC) AA31
15m
Engagement Ranges
Point=30m
Area=50m
Point=10-20m
40mm Rubber Ball (USMC) BA08
10m
40mm Foam Baton (USMC) BA07
10m
40mm M1006 Sponge Grenade (Army)
BA06
10m
Rubber Ball Grenade (USMC) GG04
4m
M5 MCCM (Army) WA97
12 GA Launching Cartridge
M84 Stun Grenade (Army) GG09
(M315 Munitions)
CS-L96A1, M98 Flash Bang, M99 NonLethal Blunt Trauma
5m
N/A
N/A
Point=15-30m
Area=Beyond 30m
Point=10-20m
Area=Beyond 30m
Point=10-30m
Area=Beyond 30m
Point=10m
Area=10-50m
Point=10m
Area=10-30m
Point=10-50m
Area=Beyond 50m
Effective blast range=2-3m
Effective range=15-20m / 50-70m
with launching cup
Area = 5-15m
N/A
N/A
50m
Area=50-100m
12 GA. Beanbag (USMC) AA29
30m
Point=30m
Area=50m
12 GA. M1013 Crowd Dispersal (ARMY)
AA52
40mm M1029 Crowd Dispersal (Army)
BA13
10m
10m
14.2.9 Range Usage: Any established range may be utilized for Non-Lethal weapons training and qualification
IAW the Camp Ripley Range Operations Appendix. Non-established ranges may be used to conduct less-lethal
weapons training when applicable. Using unit must turn in a target matrix and training plan to Range Control NLT
90 days prior of the use of a non-established range.
14.2.10 NOTE: ALL Simunitions, CCMK, and Non-Lethal Weapons to OPEN the ranges with an OIC and
RSO, have a Range Flag Up, and perform Hourly Commo Checks.
14.3 References:
14.3.1 AR 385-63
14.3.2 FM 100-1
14.3.3 FM 7.0
14.3.4 FM 7.1
14.3.5 FM 25.4
14.3.6 MCRP 3-0A
14.3.7 MCRP 3-0B
14.3.8 FM 3-19.10
14.3.9 FM 90-40
14.3.10 FM 3-07.22
14.3.11 MCI 7400
14.3.12 FN 303 OPERATORS MANUAL
14.3.13 M2 (VLAD) TM 5-4240-536-10
14.3.14 M1 (PVAD) TM 9-6350-382-12
44
Chapter 15
Mines, Firing Devices, Trip Flares, Simulators, and Explosive Charges
15.1 General
15.1.1 The OIC and RSO must meet rank/grade requirements from le 1-1, Appendix I, of this regulation.
15.1.2 L Range and six other sites are the only approved demolitions training sites in the field training area, per the
Camp Ripley Environmental Noise Management Plan, dated AUG 1999.
15.1.3 Units must submit their DEMO Plans to Range Control NLT 90 days prior to range usage. Plans must
include wiring diagrams and TNT equivalency conversions.
15.1.4 General safe practices for handling and transporting explosives are prescribed in TM 9-1375-213-12, FM
3.34.214, and DA Pamphlet 385-64.
15.1.5 A Five (5)-minute to Initiation, AND a One (1)-minute to Blast, warning calls to Range Control are
required for all demolition blasts.
15.1.6 DANGER: Do not conduct demolition work during an electrical storm, snow storm, or near any
device that emits static electricity.
15.1.7 DANGER: Handle blasting caps with extreme care and always carry them in a cap box or nonmetallic container to provide protection against shock.
15.1.8 DANGER: Do not store blasting caps closer than 25 feet from explosives.
15.1.9 NOTE: All poundage listed in this chapter is in TNT equivalents.
15.1.10 Gases released by detonation of explosives are toxic. Avoid exposure to fumes. Position personnel
upwind from detonation points, and wait until the smoke and fumes disperse before proceeding downrange.
15.1.11 Buried charges must be primed with detonating cord leading to above ground electric or non-electric
blasting caps. Blasting caps will not be buried underground as they are sensitive to shock and may detonate if hit by
a metal tool or other hard object.
15.1.12 Use detonating cord to prime charges on above ground charges to minimize the need to use blasting caps.
Once the explosive charges are primed with detonating cord, the detonating cord will be initiated with an above
ground electric, non-electric blasting cap, or modernized demolition initiator (MDI).
15.1.13 Detonation circuits will not be connected or armed on any munitions unless the intent is to detonate the
munitions. The area will be cleared of all non-mission essential personnel when munitions are to be detonated. Live
blasting caps or other live detonators will not be located at training sites if munitions are not to be detonated.
15.1.14 All personnel on any demolitions range must wear a helmet, protective body armor, single hearing
protection, and ballistic eye protection, regardless of their position on the range.
15.1.15 Only mission essential personnel will be allowed in the SDZ during firings.
15.1.16 Mixing of live and inert demolitions for training is prohibited.
15.1.17 When temporary open storage of explosives is used, stacks must not exceed 500 lbs. of explosives.
Distance between stacks must not be less than 45 meters. Demolition simulators are considered live munitions.
15.1.18 Prepare charges a minimum of 25 feet from stored demolitions.
15.1.19 Test all electrical blasting caps with a galvanometer before connecting to any explosive circuit.
15.1.20 Procedures in FM 3.34.214 and DA Pamphlet 385-63 (Chapter 15, Section 15-1, Paragraphs d., e., and f)
will be followed for all demolitions training on Camp Ripley. Both publications, as well as RC Form 5 (Surface
Danger Area Overlay Information Safety Card/Demo), must be on the demolition site at all times. Contact Range
Control for questions regarding specific types of demolition charges, fired on various target media.
15.1.21 Pack unexpended demolitions in original containers and return to the ASP.
15.2 Demolitions and Explosives
15.2.1 L Range is an established demolition range, complete with viewing bunker. The southern portion of the
range is the Small Charge Area (less than 100 lbs.). The northern portion is the Large Charge Area (100-200 lbs.)
and can accommodate firing a full Bangalore Torpedo kit.
15.2.2 DEMO-5 is the new light demolitions range UM 89562718 (located in TA 73). Maximum allowed charge
is 100 lbs. TNT equivalent.
15.2.3 NOTE: The maximum allowable charge is the equivalent of 200 pounds of TNT per blast, 10 times
per year, during daylight hours only, and a minimum of 30 minutes between blasts.
45
15.2.4 There are five approved Field Training Area Demolition Sites. They are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
4.
DEMO-1 UM 91321336
DEMO-2 UM 91851580
DEMO-4 UM 90342588
DEMO-5 UM 90092733
DEMO-6 UM 90782840
M Range Demo Site
OP-2 Demo Site
Located at the Seal Cabin
Located in TA75
Located in TA75
15.2.5 The Live-Fire Exercise Breach Facility (BREACH) is also an approved demolition site. The main purposed
of the range is for breach training utilizing using breaching charges only.
15.2.6 Bangalore Torpedoes are limited to ½ Kit (five sections) per shot in the DEMO-1 through DEMO-6 Sites.
15.2.7 The firing, handling, storing, and transporting of explosives will be IAW the provisions set forth in DA
Pamphlet 385-63, this Regulation, FM 3.34.214, TM 9-1300-206, and TM 9-1375-200.
15.2.8 Demolition explosives and associated items forecast for training are the responsibility of the using unit.
15.2.9 A five-minute and a one-minute warning must be transmitted to Range Control prior to initiating any firing
device. Notify Range Control when blasting is complete.
15.2.10 Discontinue demolition operations during, or upon the approach of, an electrical storm.
15.2.11 The OIC must ensure that personnel are at least the minimum safe distances as prescribed in DA Pamphlet
385-63, before any demolition is fired. Do not detonate charges until all personnel are at the safe distances.
15.2.12 Priming personnel must wear protective body armor while priming charges. All charges must be dual
primed and set in place, not thrown.
15.2.13 After the demolition exercise is completed, the area will be checked for unfired demolitions and
explosives.
15.2.14 Charges placed on steel are not to exceed 2 pounds unless use of an approved steel-cutting chamber is
used. Then the charges placed on steel will not exceed the chamber rating. Steel cutting charges will be fired within
an appropriate confining structure in an excavated pit at least 1 meter deep. If fired in an open pit, a mat made of
hemp-type material must cover the charge.
15.2.15 Insertion of blasting caps in charges will be performed by not more than five personnel, under the
supervision of one supervisor (protective body armor is required). The remainder of the unit will withdraw to a safe
position prior to insertion.
15.2.16 Trees larger than 2 inches in diameter will not be cut without the approval and marking by the Training
Area Coordinator.
15.2.17 All debris from demolitions and associated activities will be removed, and craters will be filled and
compacted.
15.2.18 The firing unit is responsible for covering all holes resulting from blasts. Range Control must inspect the
area prior to clearing the area.
15.2.19 Demolition misfires are the responsibility of the individual(s) who set the charge. Follow procedures
outlined in Chapter 6, section II, FM 3.34.214.
15.2.20 NOTE: The maximum allowable charge for the five additional sites is the equivalent of 150 pounds
of TNT per blast, during daylight hours only, with a minimum of 30 minutes between blasts.
15.3 Firing Devices
15.3.1 Electrical firing must be used with extreme caution and must be replaced with non-electric firing systems
when the possibility exists of unintentional detonation from extraneous electrical sources.
15.3.2 Do not conduct electric firing in training within 155 meters of energized power lines.
15.3.3 Static electricity creates a potential hazard when explosive training operations are being conducted.
15.3.4 A dual electric disconnect system will be used when installing electrical firing systems on demolitions.
Turn off the main source of power and use a lockout device.
15.3.5 Instructions in TM 9-1375-213-12 must be followed when installing, arming, and disarming firing devices.
15.3.6 Firing devices and fuzes either with or without the standard bases will not be pointed at personnel.
15.3.7 Standard bases containing unfired percussion caps, firing devices, and fuzes must not be carried in the
pocket.
15.3.8 Keep standard bases containing unfired percussion caps separated from firing devices and fuzes until the
firing device or fuze is ready to be installed in the mine or booby trap.
15.3.9 Check safety pins on firing devices and fuzes for ease of movement before attaching the standard base.
15.3.10 Install the positive safety on armed firing devices or fuzes having a tripwire attached before removing the
tripwire, the positive safety will be installed.
46
15.4 Shaped Charges
15.4.1 Shaped charges must be oriented so that gas jets are directed toward the target. Charges should be placed
on the side of the target nearest the observers when practicable, so that the blast is directed away from them.
Observers must be at least 100 meters away in a missile-proof shelter, 275 meters away in a defilade, or 1000 meters
away for unprotected personnel from shaped charges when firing.
15.4.2 All personnel must wear Kevlar helmets, protective body armor, single hearing protection and eye
protection.
15.5 Bangalore Torpedoes
15.5.1 Bangalore Torpedoes must only be fired in a horizontal position on the ground.
15.5.2 Personnel must be in a missile-proof shelter 100 meters from the charge, or 200 meters away in a defilade.
15.5.3 All personnel must wear Kevlar helmets, protective body armor, single hearing protection and eye
protection.
15.6 Mine-Clearing Line Charge (MICLIC)
15.6.1 The MICLIC must not be towed behind a M1 series tank because of high exhaust temperatures.
15.6.2 Do not allow spectators within the SDZ or noise hazard area during firing.
15.6.3 Only firing personnel are allowed in Area F.
15.6.4 Do not fire the M68 inert charge more than three times, as additional firings may result in the breakage of
the charge blocks cord and/or erratic flight of the rocket.
15.7 Cratering Charges
15.7.1 The minimum safe/standoff distance for personnel not in missile-proof shelters are as follows:
a) Up to 5 lbs.-100 meters
b) Up to 66 lbs.-300 meters
c) Over 66 lbs.-500 meters
15.7.2 Personnel located in a missile-proof shelter may be located 100 meters from the detonation site.
15.7.3 All personnel must wear Kevlar helmet, protective body armor, single hearing protection and eye
protection.
15.7.4 All cratering charges must be dual primed with detonating cord. Use of M151 and M152 for dual priming is
authorized. Do not place blasting caps underground. Attach electric or non-electric caps to the detonating cord
above ground.
15.8 Mines
15.8.1 Practice and inert mines must be color-coded and must have the appropriate identification marking stenciled
on them. Do not mix service, practice, inert mines, and fuzes.
15.8.2 Practice mines and their fuzes contain a small, low explosive charge or a smoke producing increment. They
must be color-coded and separated.
15.8.3 Claymore mines
a) Claymore mines can be fired on J or L Ranges, or on other sites approved by Range Control.
b) The Range OIC checks all mines to ensure that the following has been done prior to firing:
1) Mines are installed correctly and facing into the impact area.
2) The face of the mine marked "Front Toward Enemy", and the arrows on top of the mine, are pointed down
range.
3) Secure all mines will be secured until the Range OIC directs their issue.
4) Do not disarm emplaced mines except by order of the Range OIC.
5) Connect firing devices only at the command of the Range OIC.
6) The OIC must ensure that previous firings have not dislodged the other mines in the impact area when more
than one mine is to be fired.
7) Inspect the impact area after firing to ensure that all mines have detonated.
8) No personnel can be within the 16 meters back blast area when mines are fired. Personnel located in the 16100 meters back blast area must be in a fighting position, or behind an approved berm.
9) All personnel must wear Kevlar helmet, protective body armor, single hearing protection and eye protection.
10) Handle misfires IAW FM 23-23.
15.8.4 The Volcano multiple delivery mine system is a rapid mine dispensing system for launching antitank mines
from various vehicles. The ground system uses 5-ton cargo or dump trucks to dispense the mines. RC Form 1 must
be on site for proper deployment of the Volcano, per the SDZ.
47
15.9 Trip Flares (M48 AND M49)
15.9.1 Use inert flares to teach students in the use, emplacement, and fuzing of service flares.
15.9.2 Fence or guard each service trip flare used in training to prevent personnel from approaching within 2
meters of the emplaced flare.
15.9.3 Clear trip flare positions of flammable material to prevent accidental fires. Do not use the M48 trip flare in
areas where fire could cause serious damage
.
15.10 Simulators
15.10.1 M80 explosive simulators detonate 3 to 5 seconds after ignition of the fuse cord and are capable of causing
serious injury. Fuse cord tips should not be split, since this reduces burning time, and increases the potential for
injury to personnel. Do not use M1 and M2 type fuse igniters to ignite the M80 fuse cord or hold the M80 simulator
when ignited.
15.10.2 Procedures for the safe use of other simulators are contained in TM 9-1370-206-10, TM 9-1370-207-10,
and TM 9-1370-208-10. Do not attempt to disarm or disassemble simulators.
15.10.3 Commercially manufactured fireworks (designated for civilian use) will not be handled, stored, or used in
any way by military personnel on any installation.
15.10.4 An OIC trained in demolitions supervises emplacement and firing of the detonator. Emplace IAW
procedures outlined in FM 30-101.
15.10.5 Each unit must have a dedicated evacuation vehicle with qualified medical aid personnel, and a unit fire
fighting team available in the immediate vicinity, after the simulator is exploded. These personnel must remain until
the area is cleared.
15.10.5 IED Simulation Kit: The IED Simulation kit and battlefield effects simulator (BES) provide the tools
required to train war fighters for one of the deadliest killers on today’s battlefield.
a) The IED Simulation kit consists of the following:
1 large Simulator IED (T155FT-V2)
1 Receiver/Transmitter (RT01K4)
1 Mortar Launcher (T81MSD)
1 Pipe Bomb (T50PB)
1 Land Mine (T80PM)
1 Booby Trap (T12TWC)
1 Suicide Bomber Vest (T48SBV)
b) Camp Ripley has 2 IED Simulation kits.
c) A 2-hour class is required for the Unit’s OIC/RSO before they can draw the equipment. The class is
conducted at Supply and Services, Bldg.2-207, 320-616-3129.
d) IED Simulation kit must be requested NLT 90 days in advance. Request for use of the simulators goes
through Supply and Services.
e) Units must give the location of the IED Simulation Kit usage to Range Control prior to using the kit.
15.10.6 NOTE: The OIC declares the area is clear before any personnel are permitted within 500 feet of the
blast point.
15.10.7 The OIC ensures no loose rocks or other objects, which could serve as missiles, are above the ground,
within 18 inches of the sound charge.
15.10.8 Locate the firing point upwind from the point of detonation.
15.10.9 CAUTION - Do not remove the cardboard separator, which is stapled above the smoke charge.
Removal of the separator damages the cables and may result in a malfunction of the simulator.
15.11 Live Fire Exercise Breach Facility
The Breach Facility is used to train soldiers the technical aspects of breaching techniques on a semi-annual basis. It
is also used to train TTPs and explosive techniques not trained on any other type range.
15.11.1 This range has three separate training technique stations:
a) Station 1-Door Breaching: This station has a facade that is 8 feet high with a door opening of 33 inches by 80
inches. Soldiers can conduct mechanical, thermal, ballistic, and explosive door breaching techniques.
1) Units must let Range Control know if they are going to do shotgun training to breach the door in the units
Demo plan.
b) Station 2-Wall Breaching: This station contains a facade that measures 8 feet high by 20.5 inches wide.
Soldiers can conduct mechanical, thermal, ballistic, and explosive wall breaching.
48
c) Station 3-Window Breaching: This station contains a facade that measures 8 feet high with three window
openings measuring 32.75 inches by 38.75 inches.
15.11.2 Use C4 to breach hard targets (masonry construction items).
15.11.3 Civilian agencies that utilize this facility will be responsible for replacing all doors and windows that are
destroyed during training.
15.11.4 Charges must not be placed on the metal studs in the Station 2 facade.
15.11.5 Units must follow all other safety measures listed in this chapter, DA Pamphlet 385-63, FM 3.34.214, and
the Breach Facility SOP.
15.11.6 Maximum charge is 4 lbs. on this range.
15.11.7 NOTE: All units must order door material and windows through Automated Target Systems (ATS)
(320-616-3132/3133) NLT 90 Days prior. Civilian agencies that utilize the range must replace the doors and
windows that they utilize.
15.12 References:
15.12.1 FM 3-34
15.12.2 FM 3-34.2
15.12.3 FM 3-34.22
15.12.4 FM 3-34.210
15.12.5 FM 3-34.214 w/Change 1
15.12.6 FM 23-23
15.12.7 TM 9-1300-206
15.12.8 TM 9-1375-200
15.12.9 TM 9-1370-206-10
15.12.10 TM 9-1370-207-10
15.12.11 TM 9-1370-208-10
15.12.12 TM 9-1375-213-12
49
Chapter 16
Laser Range Safety
16.1 General
The concept of laser range safety is to prevent intra-beam viewing by unprotected personnel. This chapter prescribes
safety procedures units need to follow in order to use laser devices.
16.1.1 Lasing is authorized from Range Control approved surveyed positions only.
16.1.2 The laser (Tank, BFV, G/VLLD) must be treated like a direct fire weapon, such as a tank main gun or 25
mm cannon, and must be coordinated accordingly. Aircrews are not authorized to conduct any over the horizon
lasing.
16.1.3 Lasers are authorized on the following ranges: OP-1, OP-16, North, East, West, Center, and any point
approved by Range Control.
16.1.4 Units must immediately report any case of suspected eye exposure to laser radiation to Range Control for
medical evacuation, to ensure performance of an eye examination within 24 hours of exposure. Units must complete
a Range Accident/Incident Checklist and submit to Range Control immediately (see Appendix C).
16.1.5 Aircrews conducting laser operations will wear laser protective eyewear as required.
16.1.6 Night vision devices is not authorized for use as laser eye protection devices. These devices are not
“coverall” goggles. Laser energy may enter the eye from reflections or from around the tubes. These devices can be
bloomed (white out), damaged, or destroyed from exposure to laser radiation.
16.1.7 NOTE: Lasers are treated as direct-fire weapons.
16.2 Precautions for Laser Devices
Laser devices can seriously injure the unprotected eyes of individuals within the laser beam. Intra-beam viewing of
either the direct beam or the beam reflected from a mirror-like surface exposes the unprotected eye to a potential
hazard and must be avoided.
16.3 Firing Conditions
16.3.1 In addition to instructions on particular laser devices or simulators, the following information is specific for
this regulation installation:
a) OIC and RSO must be certified IAW DA Pamphlet 385-63, and have a Safety Certification Memorandum on
file at Range Control.
b) The OIC and RSO must receive the Range Control Safety Briefing from Range Control prior to opening any
range.
c) The RSO must conduct a detailed safety briefing to the unit conducting laser operation, prior to opening
range.
d) Medical personnel are not required on the laser range. However, proper channels for obtaining medical
assistance must be identified prior to opening the range.
e) Continuously monitor Range Control primary frequency 36.100, and perform hourly communication checks.
f) Warning signs must be posted, and barriers emplaced, to prevent unprotected personnel from moving forward
of the firing line.
g) A red range flag must be displayed when the range is open.
h) Lasing markers, internal and external, must be emplaced by the unit to identify the left and right limits (see
TC 25-8 pages C-4 and C-5).
i) An approved RC Form 6 (Surface Danger Area Overlay Information Card-Laser) must be utilized for
obtaining left and right deflection limits, and vertical angles.
1) Laser firing points with different safety data on the RC Form 6 (i.e. right and left limits) require separate
OICs and RSOs for each firing point.
2) Emplace the laser directly over the surveyed positioned stake, which is cemented in the ground, or to the left
or right of a tracked vehicle.
3) Ensure adequate backstop is provided for all targets being lased, and target area is free of specular (mirrorlike) surfaces. Examples of specular surfaces are vehicle windows, mirrors, plastic sheeting, etc. Glossy foliage,
raindrops, and other natural objects are not considered specular surfaces. Report any specular surfaces within your
zone of fire to Range Control immediately.
4) The Range OIC must complete a terrain sketch of the sector of fire for the laser prior to laser operations.
16.3.2 NOTE: Never lase personnel, wildlife, or specular surfaces. Never lase targets within 30 meters of a
reflective surface.
50
16.4 Force on Force Exercises
Tactical exercises involving MILES/AGES/AD/TWGSS/PGS do not require SDZ construction; however, NOHD
restrictions in MIL-HDBK-828A apply. The Post Commander may approve tactical exercises involving force-onforce components using laser devices other than those listed.
16.5 References:
16.5.1 AR 11-9
16.5.2 AR 40-5
16.5.3 AR 40-46
16.5.4 AR 385-9
16.5.5 FM 6-30
16.5.6 TB-MED 524
16.5.7 TM 9-1260-477-12
51
Chapter 17
Live Fire Exercises
17.1 Safety During Live-Fire Exercises
17.1.1 Live-Fire phases of training must be conducted with maximum realism and safety. If safety or terrain
limitations do require some unrealistic actions to be taken, personnel should be briefed, in detail, on why artificial
actions are required and what the unit would do if confronted with a similar situation in combat.
17.1.2 A Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise (CALFEX) (Army)/Combined Arms Exercise (CAX) (Marine
Corps) involves two or more combat arms and/or DOD services. Air and ground weapons will be used in
accordance with current doctrine, unless specifically prohibited from use by this regulation.
17.2 Information for Commander
17.2.1 Training to permit highly realistic maneuvers and LFXs involves specific personnel safety requirements.
Installation commanders must publish specific range guidance (for example, regulations, SOPs, and so forth) that
apply specifically to their installations. This guidance will define safety requirements to support live-fire training
exercises. Directives developed for a particular location are not authorized for use at a different location.
17.2.2 Commanders whose units participate in live-fire exercises must a) Make certain that all individual gunners including Bradley, tank, and aviation gunners who will take part in
live-fire exercises have fired and passed a qualification course for the weapon or system they will fire in the
exercise.
b) Conduct rehearsal (dry run) exercises prior to the live-fire and maneuver exercise. The commander must
assess the proficiency and experience level of his/her unit and the degree of risk involved to determine the scope and
duration of the rehearsal and if it should be executed on the same range on which the live-fire and maneuver training
will be conducted. The rehearsal should be scheduled as close to the actual event as is feasible to retain individual
situational awareness and skills. Additionally, when ever feasible, rehearsals will replicate as closely as possible the
conditions involved in the actual event. Such conditions should include but are not limited to time of day, similar
terrain, and the status of the personnel (that is uniforms worn, same equipment carried, and camouflage). In
addition, rehearsals must include a review of range safety requirements for the live fire and maneuver range. The
review should include, but is not limited to: range safety fans (lateral limits), SDZs for weapons and ammunition
fired, air limitations and restrictions for both live-fire and medical evacuation, and emergency and/or casualty
evacuation procedures. Commander, USASOC, may approve deviation from this requirement for Army Special
Forces (ARSOF) units. If ARSOF units are training on a non-USASOC installation, host installation commander
concurrence is required.
c) Orient participants on the capabilities of the weapons used by other components in the CALFEX/CAX.
d) Designate individuals (such as observer-controllers) who are not part of the tactical or administrative scheme
to monitor safety. These individuals must maintain visual contact with maneuvering elements and should have some
means of signaling a cease-fire. Communications with the tactical operations center is mandatory. The Marine
Corps commander must assess the proficiency and experience level of his/her unit in determining the quantity of
observer-controllers (that is, safety NCOs) required for the event. Other factors influencing this decision should
include but are not limited to: the scheme of maneuver, geometry of the attack, composition of forces, dispersion of
forces, visibility, weather conditions, and fatigue. Observers-controllers report to the Exercise Range Safety Officer,
and must have training in local range safety procedures.
17.2.3 For battalion and squadron or larger exercises, a field grade officer must be appointed as the exercise
OIC.
17.3 Exercise Training
17.3.1 Units must conduct live-fire exercises only in support of properly identified and trained-to-standards
mission essential task list (METL) tasks. Tactics, techniques, and procedures employed during the live-fire
exercises must be consistent with the standards published in the applicable Army Training Evaluation Program,
mission training plan, and/or battle drills. Command approval from the next higher command is required for any
life-fire exercise not consistent with the unit’s established METL.
17.3.2 Detailed written plans must be developed between the RCO and the unit OIC. It requires submission of
formal risk management documentation prior to execution. If residual risk is extremely high, MACOM commander
approval is required. The installation safety director reviews the completed plan and risk management
documentation that must include:
a) A detailed plan of maneuver and fire support.
b) A list of weapons, ammunition, pyrotechnic or smokes, and chemicals to be used.
c) Unit control measures, including means of communication.
52
d) Terrain feature and facilities required.
17.3.3 Impact distance and limits of advance are as follows:
a) The distances to which unprotected troops can safely move near the impact area (that is, areas A, B and C) are
indicated in the chapter on each weapon or weapons system.
b) To determine how close unprotected troops may maneuver to the target area, an impact area and an SDZ must
be established for each target area used. SDZs must be computed and issued to leaders and safety personnel before
starting the exercise. When several types of weapons are being fired into one target area, the combined total SDZ
(composite SDZ) will govern. These restrictions normally should not preclude unit commanders from selecting
tactically sound supporting weapon positions for their scheme of maneuver, provided that the positions and
directions of fire do not exceed the total range area available for the exercise. When feasible, leaders and safety
personnel must be shown the physical limits of the SDZ by ground survey.
c) The short limit of the impact area may be moved in the direction of the target area by definite prearrangement
to permit forward movement of troops.
d) Demolitions may be used during live-fire exercises according to Chapter 16.
e) Selection of weapon positions must be the responsibility of unit leaders taking part in the exercise.
f) Terrain configuration will be used to enhance safety features when terrain is being selected for live-fire
exercises involving overhead, flanking fire, or both.
17.3.4 During live-fire exercise planning, the risk management process must address possible hazards from
friendly fire and control measures to reduce or eliminate them, while executing the METL task to published
Army/Marine Corps standards.
17.4 Firing Precautions
17.4.1 Overhead fire of personnel may be authorized, provided they have positive protection from the munitions
being fired. Protected positions for personnel and vehicles are discussed in FM 5–103.
17.4.2 The installation commander (or designated representative) can authorize overhead fire above unprotected
personnel except by weapon systems specifically prohibited.
17.4.3 Weapons specifically authorized for overhead fire of unprotected personnel are—
a) All artillery cannon firing indirect fire. See Chapter 10 for safety precautions.
b) Machine-guns (5.56 mm, 7.62 mm, and .50 caliber) on ground tripods or vehicle mounts (ring mounts
excluded) firing from a stationary position.
17.4.4 Only use ammunition approved for overhead fire.
17.4.5 All firing of direct fire weapons must be from positions that provide an unobstructed field of fire.
17.4.6 Overhead fire with machineguns in live-fire exercises will be as follows:
a) Bullets must not be permitted to impact between the firing position and the rear of the line of unprotected
personnel. All impacts should be a minimum of 50 meters beyond the forward line of unprotected personnel.
b) Use positive stops to prevent crossfire and depression of the muzzle during firing.
c) Establish a minimum clearance or safety limit using the guidelines for overhead fire in FM 23–65 and FM 3–
22.68. Marine Corps personnel use Marine Corps War fighting Publication 3–15.1.
d) Rate of fire will not exceed 70 rounds per minute for 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm machineguns and 40 rounds per
minute for .50 caliber machineguns.
e) Test fire weapons before delivery of overhead fire to verify effectiveness of the positive traverse and
depression stops.
f) Tracer ammunition may be used as a check to track the projectile flight path.
17.4.7 In addition to “f.” above, the following precautions applies to overhead fire with machineguns for a
confidence infiltration course.
a) Firing must be from approved platforms as described in FM 21–75.
b) Qualified field maintenance personnel must inspect the mounts and weapons before being declared safe to
deliver overhead fire.
c) A minimum clearance of 2.5 m over the heads of personnel or the highest obstruction within the field of fire
must be maintained. Minimum clearance is the distance between the lowest shot in the dispersion pattern (as
determined by the test firing) and the bodies of individuals in erect positions on the highest point of ground, log, or
other obstacle over which personnel must travel, or heights of barbed wire strands or posts on the course, whichever
is higher.
17.4.8 All firing of indirect fire weapons must be from positions in which the site to mask allows engagement of
the targets nearest to the forward line of troops. Selection of firing positions, direction of fire, and fall of shot must
prevent the projectiles from striking trees or other obstacles in the area from the weapon position to a point forward
of unprotected personnel. The forward point is defined as the bursting radius of the round, plus 12 probable errors.
53
17.4.9 When field artillery is fired during CALFEX/CAX with maneuvering personnel, the impact area will be
adjusted according to the maneuver location of troops to maintain safe separation distance. The troop side of the
impact area will be determined in relation to the movement of the personnel. Unprotected troops are not permitted
to enter SDZ areas A, B, C, and E after firing has commenced.
17.4.10 Weapons must be grouped by muzzle velocity as cited in FM 6–40 or pertinent Marine Corps TMs.
Weapons will be bore-sighted as prescribed in FM 6–50. Tubes must be clean and dry before start of exercise and
must be cleaned during the exercise in accordance with appropriate weapon TMs.
17.4.11 All ammunition to be fired should be uniformly conditioned to ambient temperature consistent with the
tactical situation.
17.4.12 Registration.
a) At least two rounds should be fired for registration. Targets should be selected in the central portion of the
target area. After registration, corrections must be applied to deflection and quadrant elevation limits. If no
registration is fired, meteorological and velocity error (MET + VE) corrections will be applied immediately before
the exercise starts.
b) To compensate for drift, in high-angle fire the right deflection limit must be moved to the left by the amount
of the maximum drift listed within the range limits for the charges being fired. The left limit will be moved to the
right by the amount of the minimum drift listed within the range limits for the charges being fired. To determine the
appropriate drift, the tabular firing le and graphical firing scale must be examined and the safer value used. If a drift
value is not listed in the tabular firing le or on the graphical firing scale for the ranges to the near and far edge of the
target area, the nearest safer value will be used.
17.4.13 Overhead fire above unprotected personnel from a moving vehicle or aircraft is prohibited.
17.4.14 Cannon and mortar flanking fire must not impact any closer to unprotected personnel than the
fragmentation radius (area A) prescribed for each weapon.
17.4.15 Small arms (5.56 mm, 7.62 mm, and .50 caliber), ground-mounted or vehicle-mounted machineguns may
be fired at low angles of elevation (near the flank of an individual or unit). However, there must be an angle of 15°
or more between the limit of fire and the near flank of the closest individual or unit and all impacts are beyond the
individual or unit. Traversing and depression stops must be provided on machineguns to maintain the required angle
and distance between the line of fire and the near flank of an individual or unit.
17.4.16 Range SOPs must address firing and maneuver unit locations to ensure no unprotected personnel are
exposed to training fires.
17.5 Fire Control
17.5.1 The unit commander makes the final decisions on fire control measures. The following conditions must be
met:
a) The ammunition in (1) through (6) below may be authorized for use in live-fire exercises only when it is fired
into designated (dedicated high hazard) impact areas through which personnel are not permitted to maneuver:
1) 40-mm HE
2) 66-mm light antitank weapon (HE)
3) Hand grenades (HE)
4) RAAWS/MAAWS (HE & HEAT)
5) 25-mm (HE)
6) M74 66-mm TPA
b) Final coordination lines must be identified to all participating units.
c) Weapons used in live-fire exercises will be controlled so that SDZ areas (such as A, B, C, E, and F) do not
overlap areas in which unprotected personnel are maneuvering.
d) A RSO must directly supervise and control the throwing of fragmentation grenades. The following
procedures apply.
1) Hand fragmentation grenades may be thrown during LFXs. Hand grenades will be carried in accordance
with FM 3-23-20. The fragmentation characteristics of the grenades must be considered and appropriate safety
precautions taken to include the following:
(a) Impact areas must be free of obstacles (such as trees, thick vegetation, tank hulls, deep snow, or standing
water).
(b) A minimum side-to-side distance of 5 m between each individual during the throwing exercise is
required.
(c) Throwing positions must protect the throwers from fragments.
(d) EOD personnel must destroy dud grenades in place or safe and remove before troops enter the grenade
impact area. Troop maneuver through the impact area is not authorized if EOD personnel are unable to locate or
destroy and dud grenades.
54
2) Individuals being transported by vehicle or aircraft MUST NOT carry fragmentation, offensive, or white
phosphorus grenades attached to web equipment.
17.6 Air Support
17.6.1 The following control measures are required prior to firing aircraft-mounted weapons or dropping airdelivered ordnance during live-fire exercises:
a) Positive identification of personnel locations
b) Positive identification of targets
c) Positive clearance to fire as given by the controlling ground or airborne forward air controller
17.6.2 Attack flight paths and access corridors will be known and visually verified by ground personnel and
participating aircrews.
17.6.3 Establish and maintain direct communications between the OIC, the forward air controller, the FDC, and
Range Control.
17.7 Training Unit’s Responsibilities
Units desiring to conduct a live-fire exercise must comply with the procedures indicated below:
17.7.1 NLT 90 days in advance of firing, the unit is required to submit the following to Range Control:
a) Appointed OIC and RSO for LFX with unit POC. The OIC must be a field grade officer or higher, for a
battalion or larger CALFEX.
b) Concept of Operation
c) Requested LFX areas
d) Types of weapons, ammunition, smoke, chemicals, and pyrotechnics
e) Target system support. Refer to Appendix C of TC 7-9.
f) Safety issues or concerns that effect the LFX
17.7.2 NLT 90 days prior to firing, Range Control requires a detailed OPLAN with the following information:
a) A detailed scenario (which includes sketches and/or overlays) that defines the scheme of maneuver, and the
integration of supporting fires.
b) Coordination lines, or checkpoints, to identify maneuver limits.
c) Limits of fire for each element and/or weapon Surface Danger Zone.
d) Specific controls for firing while moving.
e) Communication and control measures.
f) Safety Checklist. Refer to Appendix A of TC 7-9 for an example.
g) Risk Management Worksheet. Refer to Appendix A of TC 7-9, and Appendix B of this regulation.
17.7.3 NLT 72 hours prior to any LFX/CALFEX, the OIC must conduct a walk-through of the LFX terrain with
the RCO or NCOIC.
17.7.4 Prior to the LFX/CALFEX, the OIC must obtain copies of the approved Surface Danger Zone from Range
Control, stating established safety limits for all weapons to be used in the LFXCALFEX.
17.7.5 Unit Commanders must brief participants on the capabilities of the weapons used by the other components
of the exercise.
17.8 Range Control Responsibilities
17.8.1 The Post Commander has final approval for all LFX and CALFEX conducted at Camp Ripley.
17.8.2 Assist the unit OIC in developing SDZs.
17.8.3 Review of detailed OPLAN for safety considerations.
17.8.4 Preparation of targetry systems and ranges.
17.8.5 Upon request, provide copies of past LFX/CALFEX scenarios conducted on Camp Ripley that include
safety checklists and Deliberate Risk Assessment Worksheet (DD Form 2977).
17.8.6 Upon receipt and review of information the RCO or NCOIC notifies the unit POC within five working
days, to schedule an initial discussion of the LFX/CALFEX plan.
17.9 Changes in LFX/CALFEX Scenarios
Any changes prior to, or during, the LFX must be requested only by the Range OIC, and approved by the RCO or
NCOIC.
17.10 Infantry Platoon Battle Course (IPBC)
The IPBC consists of a Practice Lane and two Maneuver Lanes (Light and Heavy), with Trench and Bunker systems
within each lane. The range supports squad through company size elements, with Armor/Mech support. It can also
be incorporated into a CALFEX.
55
17.10.1 General
a) Units must adhere to all safety measures listed in paragraphs 17.2 and 17.5, and in the range SOP.
b) Weapons firing within the trenches must be oriented in a westerly direction. No live grenades or anti-armor
weapons is authorized for use to engage the bunkers and trenches.
c) Ammunition personnel must ensure that blank ammunition is kept separated from live ammunition when
issuing ammunition.
d) Motorola Talk-About walkie-talkies are available from Range Control, for internal range communications.
e) Units must open/close the range through Range Control via their primary form of communication, preferably
SINCGARS radio.
17.10.2 Additional Information
a) An Open-Air Classroom is located at UM 927215. This is west of the Trout Pond on Livorno Trail.
b) Ammunition Supply Point will be in the same area.
c) Barrier 40 will be in the Down-Not-Locked status for unit entrance point. Using unit must have a road guard
at Barrier 40 once the range is in the Open status. Road guard must have communications with the Range OIC.
d) The Range OIC, RSO, Senior Observer Controller (SOC), Squad OC, and Weapon OC must attend a Range
Control Safety Briefing prior to opening the range.
17.11 Convoy Live Fire Exercise (CLFX)
17.11.1 NOTE: DUE TO BATWING SDZ RESTRICTIONS AND CURRENT TARGET LOCATIONS,
WEAPONS FIRING FOR .50 CAL AND 7.62MM ARE LIMITED TO CERTAIN TARGET AREAS.
TARGET SCENARIOS ARE APPROVED ON A CASE-BY-CASE BASIS, DEPENDENT ON THE FIELD
TRAINING AREA, OPTEMPO, AND THE TARGET SCENARIO REQUESTED BY THE UNIT.
17.11.2 This range provides, under controlled conditions, a live-fire exercise for patrol size elements conducting
convoy operations. The lane is approximately 5 kilometers in length, located on Cassino Road. It offers five target
engagement areas with 83 possible target locations, and a guardrail checkpoint area. There is a basic target set-up
on the range. See the CLFX Range description page in A and the CLFX SOP for target locations.
17.11.3 Unit requests the CLFX NLT 90 days prior to range usage, utilizing ATS Form 23.
17.11.4 Unit submits OPLAN and Deliberate Risk Assessment Worksheet (DD Form 2977) to Range Control
NLT 90 days prior to range usage.
17.11.5 Units must submit a copy of the scenario and target layout if different than the target layout already setup
on the range to Range Control NLT 30 days prior to range usage.
17.11.6 Range Assembly Area is located in TA 58. Road Barriers 42 and 46 will be Down-Not-Locked for
entering and exiting the lane. Road Guards will be in position at both barriers prior to opening the range.
17.11.7 Units must open/close the range through Range Control, utilizing RC Form 39 (Convoy Live Fire Lane
Opening/Closing Checklist).
17.11.8 The Range OIC must have continuous communications with Range Control (primary frequency is
SINCGARS 36.100, alternate frequency is 36.900), with each vehicle (Motorola Talk-About radios) in an iteration,
and with the road guards at Barriers 42 and 46. There is an OE254 Antenna located beside the Tin Shed on the
CLFX Range Assembly Area.
17.11.9 Range RSO must ensure that all weapon safety-limiting devices are in place prior to start of the exercise.
17.11.10 Using unit need the following range support staff to conduct the range:
a) Range OIC (E-7 and above)
b) Range RSO (E-6 and above)
c) Vehicle Commander/Safety Observer (One for each vehicle in iteration)
d) Script Reader/RTO
e) Medic- must have Aid Bag, vehicle with operational radio, and a litter
f) Ammunition NCO
g) Two personnel for Ammo Detail
h) Four road guards-two for Barrier 42, two for Barrier 46
17.11.11 For additional range and safety information, reference the CLFX SOP located in the range packet and at
Range Control.
17.12 References:
17.12.1 Chapter 17, DA Pamphlet 385-63 Range Safety
17.12.2 TC 7-9 Infantry Live Fire Training
17.12.3 CLFX SOP, dated 31 May 2005
17.12.4 All weapon systems FMs and TMs utilized in the LFX/CALFEX
56
Chapter 18
Environmental Management
18.1 General
18.1.1 Environmental protection and conservation are the responsibilities of all personnel using Camp Ripley
training facilities. Commanders must ensure that no wanton or deliberate destruction of natural or cultural resources
occur during training exercises.
18.1.2 For information on environmental management, the Environmental Office (320- 616-2722/2719/2720) or
Range Control (320-616-3137/3135) has leader/Soldier handbooks and field cards are available for Soldiers and
units.
18.2 Limited Use Areas
18.2.1 A universal marking system (Siebert Stakes) marks all Limited Use Areas on Camp Ripley. The “Siebert
Stake” has alternating Red and Amber reflective tape that is Night Vision Device compatible.
18.2.2 The areas marked with Siebert Stakes include, but are not limited to:
a) Culturally protected areas
b) Historic Fort Ripley
c) Closed Dump sites
d) Threatened/Endangered species habitat
e) Training hazards
18.2.3 The Camp Ripley 1:25,000 map displays the Limited Use areas in the field training area. Units should
review the map prior to training and plan accordingly. Maps are available at Range Control or by contacting the
Training Area Coordinator at (320)616-3135.
18.3 Restrictions on Firing White Phosphorus
18.3.1 Firing of White Phosphorus ammunition into the sensitive wetland areas within the HENDRICKSON and
LEACH Impact Areas is prohibited.
18.3.2 White Phosphorus will not be fired directly into, or within 100-meters, or have airburst directly over,
wetland areas. The sensitive areas, including the 100-meter buffer, are identified on maps located in the
Environmental and Range Control Offices, and are included in the Range Packets.
18.4 Field Water Points
Camp Ripley has designated three areas for establishing and operating field water points that are intended to support
troops in training for field showers, laundry, and pole water.
1
Crow Wing River
UM 926295
2
Mississippi River Rest Area 3
UM 939091
3
Ferrell Lake SE Corner
UM 908072
Crow Wing and Mississippi Rivers are Designated
Zebra Mussel infested by MN DNR
18.4.1 Clear all water points through Range Control. Units must submit a written request, including unit name,
address, telephone number, and type of water point operation including pole water, shower, and/or laundry points
with the preferred location to initiate the approval process.
18.4.2 The designated water points are equipped with a crushed rock drain field for disposing of wastewater
generated at the water point. Wastewater includes backwash water from water purification, and gray water from
laundry and shower activities. Supply and Services (320-616-3128) issue the PVC piping for waste water disposal
drain field.
18.4.3 Un-established Water points used by units not hauling their pole water off site must also follow the same
approval procedures. However, environmental standards for locating these water points will limit water points of
this nature. The standards include a 100-meter setback from lakes, streams, wetlands, and historic sites.
Furthermore, wastewater discharge must be mixed with purified water to its original concentration and shall be
applied to land surface using the plastic drain field pipe.
18.4.4 Crow Wing River site (UM 939283) is a permanent, self-sufficient electrical pump operated pole water
point. This site is used to draw water only.
18.4.5 It is illegal to transport unpurified water (filtered 40 microns or greater) from infested waters, Mississippi
and Crow Wing Rivers, except by DNR permit.
18.4.6 Water treated with greater than a 40-micron filter may not be discharged where it can run into another
basin, another river, or a drain system that does not go to a treatment facility.
57
18.4.7 Ensuring that equipment is clean is critical to limiting the spread of invasive species. Any equipment used
to treat Mississippi or Crow Wing River water must be treated by one of the following means prior to use in another
water body:
18.4.8 Power spray equipment to remove dirt, mud, or vegetation. Scraping may be necessary if objects were in
the water for extended periods, or
a) Dry 3 days in temperatures over 65 F. Drying is NOT recommended in cool wet weather (65 F.).
b) Wash with 104 F. water for 4 minutes (hotter temps result in better and shorter kill times), or
c) Freeze for 2 days, or
d) Treat water with 750mg/l KCL for 1 hour, followed by 25 mg/l formalin for 2 hours to kill zebra mussel
veligers.
18.5 Fire Control Procedures
18.5.1 There shall be no fires started without the permission of Range Control.
18.5.2 Range Control must be notified immediately by the responsible unit when wild fires are started because of
range firing. Unit personnel must be available to assist Range Control with the fire suppression efforts, if necessary.
18.5.3 The unit will report the following information to Range Control:
a) The location of the fire by range designation, grid, or road reference.
b) Whether or not sufficient personnel and equipment are available to extinguish the fire.
c) Wildland fires in impact areas must be reported and monitored. Unit personnel must not enter impact areas.
d) Fire danger status must be posted on a sign immediately adjacent to E gate outside the Range Control office. It
will also be posted on the Range Bulletin.
FIRE DANGER CODE
GREEN
YELLOW
RED
Low
Moderate
Use normal caution. Fire will start easily. All authorized ammunition,
explosives, and pyrotechnics will be allowed on live fire ranges and training
areas.
High
Use extra caution. Fire will start very easily. The beginning of the high danger
period. Any type of ammunition may be used, with care, on ranges and within
impact areas. Use of pyrotechnics, demolitions, and heat or flame-producing
devices within training areas should be limited as much as possible to cleared
areas or areas previously burned for that purpose.
Very High
Extreme
Flash condition. This is the highest class of fire danger. Fires started are
practically impossible to extinguish and usually continue until danger rating
conditions improve or they burn themselves out. The utmost caution with fire
producing agents and devices must be exercised at all times. Only ball
ammunition will be used, no illumination round will be fired; no pyrotechnics,
no other type of ammunition, or explosive will be used.
18.6 Historical Preservation
18.6.1 Camp Ripley has numerous areas of historical or archaeological significance. The majority of these sites
have been located and marked. Many of these areas are off limits to all troops. Caution should be maintained when
operating near known areas. At no time shall deliberate destruction take place at sites of historical or archaeological
significance.
18.6.2 Any individual finding an artifact or item of historical or archeological significance is required by law and
policy to not touch or disturb. Record the location and contact Range Control to initiate the process of
determination, if any artifacts are found.
18.6.3 Digging, and tracked vehicle maneuvers are prohibited within 100 meters of a historical or archaeological
site.
18.7 Noise Monitoring
Noise is inherent to the operation of Camp Ripley and the surrounding communities will be impacted. As a result,
Camp Ripley Operations Office responds to all noise complaints, and maintains a record of all complaints.
18.7.1 Electric generators in support of training activities produce considerable noise. When generators are
located within 500 meters of the Camp boundaries, digging in or sand bagging will reduce noise levels.
18.7.2 Current noise abatement policy prohibits unnecessary over-flying of populated areas at altitudes lower than
1,000 feet AGL
18.7.3 In addition, the following noise sensitive areas shall be avoided whenever possible:
58
a) Post Headquarters-located at the south end of the airfield.
b) VIP Quarters (Valhalla)-located on the West side of the airfield.
c) Green Prairie Fish Lake
d) Lake Alexander
e) Crow Wing Lake
f) All Turkey farms, directly north of the R4301 area.
g) Round Lake and Three Fingers Lake
h) Area towns and cities
i) The Brainerd Lakes Area, Northwest of the City of Brainerd.
j) Mississippi River adjacent to Camp Ripley, below 1,500 feet MSL.
18.8 Field Fuel Storage/Bladders
Camp Ripley has identified 10 areas approved for installing field fuel storage bladders exceeding 1,000 gallons in
capacity. Emplacement of bladders in locations other than those approved is prohibited, unless special provisions
are requested and granted by the Environmental office.
18.8.1 Units proposing to install field fuel storage bladders in approved, or unapproved area must submit a written
request in advance. The request must include name, address, and phone number of the unit; amount and type of fuel
to be dispensed; number/volume of fuel bladders to be installed; dates of operation; preferred location on Camp
Ripley; and the unit point of contact.
18.8.2 The following guidance pertains to the installation and operation of field fuel storage bladders:
a) The site will not be located within 100 meters of any lake, stream, wetlands, or historical site.
b) The site will not be located within 200 meters of the Mississippi and Crow Wing rivers.
c) Preparation of the site, underlying the fuel bladder, will require excavating the topsoil to provide a level site,
and to ensure that all debris is cleared that might otherwise puncture the flexible storage container.
d) A continuous berm, surrounding the storage site, must be constructed using on-site soils. The dimensions of
the bermed area should not be less than the total capacity of the fuel storage bladder located within the area. The
bermed area must be lined with an impervious material to act as a secondary containment, in case of any failure or
seepage from the storage container. This material is issued through the Logistics Division, Camp Ripley, (320) 6163128/3130.
e) The area designated for conveying the fuel (i.e., hoses, piping, etc.) must be underlain with an impermeable
liner.
f) Range Control, or Environmental Office personnel will conduct daily inspections of the site.
18.9 Mobile POL Distribution Points
POL distribution from mobile units is an activity that has the potential of posing environmental concerns; therefore,
the following guidance is provided to prevent any negative impacts:
18.9.1 The proposed location of distribution points should be coordinated with Range Control.
18.9.2 Use drip pans at all times for the dispensing nozzles, and the dispensing area should be lined with a small
piece of impermeable liner such as plastic or an old fuel bladder.
18.9.3 Ensure that the fueling hose is drained into the drip pan after each fueling operation and hang the hoses with
the nozzle pointed up.
18.9.4 Provide empty drums for accumulating POL contaminated soil in the event of small spills. The drums
should be labeled “POL Contaminated Soil.” These drums can be obtained at the Logistics Division, Bldg. 2-207.
18.9.5 Empty containers should be available to accumulate contaminated/waste fuels. One container for each type
of fuel and the containers should be labeled accordingly. These containers are available from the POL Tank Farm.
Contaminated fuels will be turned in to the Camp Ripley POL Office, Bldg. 17-99, (320) 616-3001.
18.9.6 Each POL distribution point should be equipped with a spill kit in the event of a spill. The kit should
include absorbent materials, shovel and plastic storage bags.
18.10 Mechanical Digging
Digging or earth excavation requires written approval from the Range Control Office. Request must include type
and grid location of excavation with time and duration to be used. Range Control approves permits with
concurrence from the Department of Public Works (DPW) to ensure facilities (above and below ground) are not
affected. The request will also be coordinated with the environmental office.
18.10.1 Mechanical digging is permitted in the training areas, except for the following restrictions:
a) Signed tree plantations
b) 100 meters from historical sites
c) 100 meters from surface water or wetlands
d) Active logging sites
59
e) 50 meters from main roads
f) 200 meters from the Mississippi River
18.10.2 Maps with all above listed areas identified are available at Range Control, Bldg. 24-199, 320-6163137/6015.
18.11 Vegetation
18.11.1 Units are encouraged to select locations that have sufficient natural concealment. This will minimize the
need to cut vegetation for camouflage. However, it is permissible to utilize natural vegetation as necessary for
concealing vehicles, gun emplacements, and fortifications. The following restrictions apply:
a) Use native hardwood species (oak, maple, aspen, ironwood, hazel brush, etc.) that are less than two inches in
diameter.
b) Do not cut evergreens (pine, spruce, tamarack, red cedar, etc.) unless special permission is granted through
Camp Ripley Range Control Office.
18.11.2 Larger timbers may be needed for fortification. It is permissible to utilize any dead or down trees
throughout the training area. In addition, telephone poles may be requested from the Department of Public WorksRoads and Railroads Division. Contact Range Control to initiate the request.
18.12 Greywater Procedures
18.12.1 Greywater is defined as wastewater generated from wash hand basins, mobile kitchens, and mobile bath
and Camp Ripley requires that you dump in designated areas.
18.12.2 Y-2 and Y-4 have designated greywater storage tanks that are for use if reserved in RFMSS, but any
unscheduled request to dump greywater needs to be taken to DeParq woods and coordinated.
18.12.3 NOTE: Y-2 and Y-4 still coordination prior to use
18.12.4 Coordination is needed prior to the use of the greywater disposal sites. Contact Range Control at 320616-3137 or the Training Area Coordinator at 320-616-3135.
60
Appendix A
RANGE DESCRIPTIONS
61
RANGE AND TRAINING OVERVIEW
Camp Ripley has some of the nation’s most modern ranges. The post can accommodate most weapon systems
organic to a heavy brigade.
A-RANGE COMPLEX
The A-Range Complex allows commanders flexibility during zero and qualification of individual weapons. The
complex includes the following ranges (all within walking distance):
 All weather classrooms
 Zero and Known Distance Ranges
 Automated Rifle and Pistol Ranges
 7-station MOUT Range (with sewer trainer)
 23-station Confidence Course
 Rappel Tower
 M320 Range
 Practice Hand Grenade Lane
 Hand Grenade Qualification Course
 Land Navigation Course
 EFMB Litter Obstacle Course
 Live Fire Facility (Shoot House)
 Field Leader Reaction Course
Miller Complex
Camp Ripley has grouped four major ranges (East Range, Center Range, West Range, and North Range, along
with M-COFT pad sites) into the Miller Complex. The ranges offer training from individual to platoon level
collective tasks. The ranges provide for training of Tank and BFV crews on their respective Gunnery les I-XII. The
Miller Complex provides for a logical progression and maximum throughput capacity. The Complex allows two
battalions to fulfill gunnery requirements during a typical Annual Training of two weeks duration. This Complex
provides battle courses for use of live fire or Multiple Integrated Engagement System (MILES) during Situational
Training Exercise (STX) of Field Training Exercises (FTX). These exercises train squads through company/team
level units on collective tasks in state-of-the-art simulated combat environments. The location of these ranges
greatly facilitates their use for gunnery while allowing suile area for multiple company size lanes training. The
Complex can also be integrated into all FTX scenarios on other portions of the training area.
Training Areas
The Field Training Area (FTA) is divided into 78 separate Training Areas. The Training Areas provide a variety
of terrain and vegetation. Camp Ripley’s terrain meet the needs of Mechanized Forces, Light Forces, Support Units,
and Special Forces.
Special Operations
Since Camp Ripley has the Mississippi River and the Crow Wing River as boundaries, special operations units
have more flexibility to set up training scenarios, including live-fire exercises. The post has surveyed drop zones,
numerous water training areas and has no civilian roads or dwellings in the FTA.
Range Map Disclaimer
The range maps in this Appendix are not to scale. They are included for reference purposes only. Contact Range
Control for scaled range maps.
62
Established Ranges
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-9
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15
ARNO DZ
B-1
B-2
B-2 Shoothouse
B-3
B-4
B-5
B-6
B-7
B-8
Bennet Hill
BREACH
C
C1 IED
Range_IED
CACTF
CRG
CLFX
CTF
UM 91980857
UM 92460867
UM 92310857
UM 91410857
UM 91140857
UM 92430857
UM 92540846
UM 91610857
UM 91850857
UM 90930853
UM 92630868
UM 92260808
UM 92700872
UM 92540803
UM 88112524
UM 92581646
UM 92581709
UM 92581709
UM 92451375
UM 95420691
UM 94170699
UM 94170827
UM 93100695
UM 94180746
UM 93520879
UM 92081586
UM 92550794
Small Arms Known Distance Range/25m Zero Range-32 Firing Points
Combat Pistol Qualification Range (CPQR)-15 Firing Points
Modified Record Fire (MRF) Range-16 Firing Points
Modified Record Fire (MRF) Range-16 Firing Points
Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain (MOUT) Assault Course
Confidence Obstacle Site
Rappel Tower and Practice Tower
M320/M320 Grenade Launcher Range-5 Firing Points
Hand Grenade Qualification Course and Practice Lane
Ferrell Lake Navigation Course
25 meter Zero Range-32 Firing Points
EFMB Litter Obstacle Course
Live Fire Facility (Shoot House)
Field Leader Reaction Course
Air Drop Zone
25 meter Zero Range-32 Firing Points
25 meter Zero Range-32 Firing Points
Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain (MOUT) Assault building
Gettysburg Road Land Navigation Course
Mounted Land Navigation Course
Land Navigation Course
Engineer Dig Site
Land Navigation Course
Tactical Mine Lane
3 Ski Runs/1 Tubing Run with Tow Rope
Live-Fire Exercise Breach Facility
NBC Course
UM 92550794
IED Lane
UM 92560768
UM 88391347
UM 92722308
UM 93990695
D
UM 93601202
DEMO-1
DEMO-2
DEMO-4
DEMO-5
DEMO-6
DT-1
DT-2
DT-3
ERG
EVOC
UM 91321336
UM 91851580
UM 90342588
UM 90092733
UM 90782840
UM 91750694
UM 87691185
UM 91151336
UM 90201263
UM 95400636
F
UM 90900944
Combined Arms Collective Training Facility (MOUT)
Under new construction for Multi-Purpose Training Range (MPTR)
Convoy Live Fire Exercise
Collective Training Facility (MOUT)
Shotgun/Short Range Marksmanship Range: South Firing Line=40 Firing
Points/North Firing Line=20 Firing Points
M Range Field Demolitions Site
OP-2 Field Demolitions Site
SEAL CABIN Field Demolitions Site
Light Demolitions Range
TA75 Field Demolitions Site
Tracked/Wheeled Vehicle Driver Training Course
Tracked/Wheeled Vehicle Driver Training Course
Tracked/Wheeled Vehicle Driver Training Course
Multi-Purpose Training Range (MPTR)
Emergency Vehicle Operator Course
Biathlon Course-31 Firing Points/25 meter Zero Range-29 Firing
Points/Tactical Training Base
63
Established Ranges (continued…)
FARP
F&M-1
F&M-2
HGR
IPBC
ISBC
J
K
L
UM 87041108
UM 92151916
UM 93361119
UM 90721423
UM 92752139
UM 88272886
UM 90881469
UM 91172312
UM 90721423
M
UM 91421336
MK-19
UM 92362310
NRG
UM 9251645
NRG ECP
OP-1
OP-2
OP-15
OP-16
OP-19
OP-23
R
React to
Contact
RIPLEY DZ
SEAL Cabin
Scaled Range
UM 93051675
UM 90991464
UM 91961560
UM 91382310
UM 90132467
UM 91332773
UM 92742384
UM 92040551
Forward Area Refueling Point
Fire and Movement Range
Fire and Movement Range
Hand Grenade Range (Live Grenade Familiarization)
Infantry Platoon Battle Course
Infantry Squad Basic Course
Multi-Purpose Field Fire Range (200m Firing Line)
Multi-Purpose Field Fire Range
Demolitions Range
Mortar Short Range Training Round (SRTR) Range-4 Firing Points/25m Zero32 Firing Points
MK-19 Multi-Purpose Gunnery Range (40mm TP ONLY)
Multi-Purpose Machine Gun Range(MPMG); 6 Lanes (lanes 2-5 equipped with
1500m targets)
Entry Control Point (ECP) Trainer Lane
Observation Point
Observation Point/Mortar Firing Point
Observation Point
Observation Point/Mortar Point
Observation Point/Mortar Point
MK-19 40 mm HE / Mortar Point/Observation Point
Vehicle Recovery Site
UM 96142713
React to Contact Lane
UM 90911381
UM 90322612
UM 95300602
UAC
UM 92581674
W-1
W-2
WEST
(WRG)
Y-1
Y-2 EAST
Y-2 WEST
Y-4
UM 90320767
UM 93631237
Air Drop Zone
Non-Standard Small Arms Range
Scaled Vehicle Mounted Weapon Systems Course
Urban Assault Course-Station 3 is the Grenadier Gunnery Trainer (40mm TP
ONLY) and single person Fire & Maneuver Lane (5.56mm)
Ferrell Lake Pontoon Bridge Site
Mississippi River Ribbon Bridge Site
UM 86551350
Multi-Purpose Machine Gun Range/Heavy Sniper Lane
UM 93770696
UM 90260616
UM 90060538
UM 95462646
POW Camp/Tactical Training Base
Tactical Training Base
Tactical Training Base
Tactical Training Base
64
A-1
KNOWN DISTANCE AND 25M ZERO RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 921087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.2 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
25M ZERO RANGE: PORTABLE TARGET STANDS
KNOWN DISTANCE RANGE: FIRING LINES ARE AT 100, 200, 300, 400, 500,
600, AND 1000 YARDS. TARGET PITS INCLUDE PUSH-UP, PULL-DOWN
SLIDING TARGET FRAME LIFTERS. REFLEXIVE FIRE CAN ALSO BE
PERFORMED ON THIS RANGE.
SHOTGUN THROUGH .50 Cal.
COORDINATED BY UNIT WITH RANGE CONTROL, AS REQURIED BY
WEAPON SYSTEM, COURSE, AND DISTANCE BEING FIRED
KD RANGE: 32 POINTS ON ALL FIRING LINES, EXECPT THE 1000 YD LINE,
WHICH HAS 10.
25M ZERO: 32 POINT PEA ROCK LINE
353 DEGREES MAGNETIC
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND
SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES-PITS SHED AND 25M ZERO SHED
NO
YES-40 PERSON CAPACITY (NO INDOOR LATRINE FACILITIES)
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
AT BARRIERS #1 AND #2 ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD, WHEN FIRING 500-1000
YARD LINES. ROAD GUARDS MUST HAVE COMMO WITH THE RANGE
OIC.
IF A-3 RANGE IS OCCUPIED, FIRING WILL BE FROM THE 25M ZERO LINE
ONLY. 300-1000 YARD LINES CLOSE A-3 RANGE. 500-1000 YD FIRING
LINE USAGE INTERMITTENTLY CLOSES CHAMPAGNE ROAD. 7.62MM
MATCH GRADE AMMO CLOSES NORMANDY ROAD.
WHEN SCHEDULING THIS RANGE FOR KD FIRING, UNITS SHOULD ALSO
SCHEDULE A-3 AS A NON-LIVE FIRE RANGE, TO AVOID USAGE
CONFLICTS BETWEEN BOTH RANGES.
PAPER TARGETS MUST BE REMOVED FROM THE LIFTER TARGET
FRAMES AFTER USE.
THE 500 YD LINE IS THE SOUTH SHOULDER OF CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
THERE IS NO PARKING ALLOWED ALONG THE EAST SIDE OF THE RANGE
ROAD.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR TO
RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING TRASH
DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH
RECEPTACLES.
65
66
A-1 SOUTH
SHOTGUN/.22 CAL. RIFLE/ARCHERY
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 921087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.2 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS IS A SMALL WEAPON FAMILIARIZATION RANGE ONLY
ALL SHOTGUN; .22 CAL. RIFLE; ARCHERY
COORDINATED BY UNIT WITH RANGE CONTROL, AS REQURIED
BY WEAPON SYSTEM.
OIC LINES-UP FIRERS PARALLEL TO CHAMPAGNE ROAD, WITHIN
THE ENDS OF THE A-1 600YD LINE BERM
180 DEG MAG
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
ON A-1
NO
YES-40 PERSON CAPACITY (NO LATRINE FACILITIES)
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
LAY-OUT RANGE FLAG ON HOOD OF A VEHICLE THAT WILL BE
LOCATED AT THE RANGE BOUNDARY TRAIL AND CHAMPAGNE
ROAD INTERSECTION.
IT IS SUGGESTED THAT AN ARSO OBSERVE THE RANGE
BOUNDARY TRAIL TO ENSURE THAT NO ONE BREACHES THE
BARRIERS CLOSING OFF THIS RANGE, ESPECIALLY FROM THE
SOUTH.
THIS RANGE CLOSES A-1 KD RANGE 600 YD AND 1000 YD FIRING
LINES.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
67
68
A-2
COMBAT PISTOL QUALIFICATION RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 925087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
COMPUTER SCORED RANGE. EACH LANE CONSISTS HAS 7
AUTOMATED TARGETS. THESE TARGETS ARE AT 10, 13, 16, 17, 23,
27, AND 31 METERS. NON-STANDARD REFLEXIVE FIRING CAN BE
PERFORMED ON THE RANGE AS WELL.
PISTOL AND 5.56MM
PERMANENTLY INSTALLED TARGET LIFTERS
15 STATIONARY FIRING POINTS ARE PAINTED ON THE ASPHALT
FIRING LINE
350 DEGREES MAGNETIC
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
YES
NO-CAN UTILIZE A-3 OR A-12 CLASSROOMS, IF AVAILABLE.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
COMPUTER SCENARIO CHANGES MUST BE REQUESTED
THROUGH AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS NLT 72 HOURS PRIOR
TO USAGE.
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND
RECEIPT TO MILITARY UNITS.
FOR TARGETRY PROBLEMS, CALL ATS, PHONE # 3132/3133.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
69
70
A-3
MODIFIED RECORD FIRE RANGE
LOCATION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
UM 923087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
COMPUTER SCORED RANGE. EACH LANE HAS 6 AUTOMATED
TARGETS. ONLY THE RIGHT-HAND 50M TARGET IS AVAILABLE.
FURTHEST TARGET IS AT 300M. THIS RANGE HAS DAY AND
NIGHT FIRE CAPABILITY.
PISTOLS-7.62MM BALL. 7.62MM BALL AUTHORIZED ON LANES 111 ONLY.
PERMANENTLY INSTALLED TARGET LIFTERS
FIRING LINE
16 CONCRETE STANDING AND PRONE POSITIONS
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
357 DEGREES MAGNETIC
RIGHT LIMIT
ORANGE POLE
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
LATRINE FACILITIES
COVERED MESS
TARGET BLDG
YES- INSIDE CLASSROOMS
YES: FACILITY # 14206
NO
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
YES
CLASSROOM
YES-2: NAMED A-302E AND 302-W. 40-PERSON CAPACITY EACH.
USAGE OF THE WEST CLASSROOM IS INCLUDED WITH THE
RANGE RESERVATION.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
GREEN POLE
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
NEXT TO THE AMMUNITION BUILDING
N/A
COMPUTER SCENARIO CHANGES MUST BE REQUESTED
THROUGH AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS NLT 72 HOURS PRIOR
TO USAGE. THIS RANGE CANNOT BE OCCUPIED IF A-1 PITS (KD)
IS RESERVED.
FOR TARGETRY PROBLEMS CALL ATS, PHONE # 3132/3133.
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND
RECEIPT TO MILITARY UNITS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
71
72
A-4
MODIFIED RECORD FIRE RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
COVERED MESS
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 915087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.7 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
EACH LANE HAS 6 TARGETS FROM 50-300M. ONLY THE RIGHTHAND 50M TARGET IS AVAILABLE. TARGET HITS ARE
COMPUTER SCORED WITH PRINTOUT. THIS RANGE HAS DAY
AND NIGHT FIRE CAPABILITY.
PISTOLS THROUGH 7.62MM BALL. 7.62MM BALL AUTHORIZED ON
LANES 6-9 ONLY.
PERMANENT TARGET LIFTERS. PORTABLE TARGET STANDS ARE
AVAILABLE FOR NON-AUTOMATED RANGE USAGE.
16 FIRING POINTS WITH CONCRETE PITS AND PRONE POSITIONS
30 DEGREES MAGNETIC
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
YES-IN CLASSROOM
YES: FACILITY # 14207
NO
YES
YES-30 PERSON CAPACITY
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
COMPUTER SCENARIO CHANGES MUST BE REQUESTED
THROUGH AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS NLT 72 HRS PRIOR TO
RANGE USAGE.
FOR TARGETRY PROBLEMS CALL ATS, PHONE # 3132/3133.
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND
RECEIPT TO MILITARY UNITS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
73
74
A-5
MOUT ASSAULT COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
RESTRICTIONS
UM 912087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 6 BUILDING STRUCTURES AND A STORM
SEWER TRAINER. EACH STRUCTURE HAS ITS OWN TRAINING
PURPOSE.
BLANKS, SIMUNITIONS, PYROTECHNICS, CS, AND TEAR GAS.
N/A
NONE
N/A
N/A
N/A
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
N/A
N/A
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED FOR
SIMUNITIONS AND GAS GUNS ONLY. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
OIC AND RSO ARE REQUIRED FOR BLANKS, SIMUNITIONS, AND
GAS. MUST BE ON WEAPON SAFETY CERTIFICATION
MEMORANDUM AND HAVE A CURRENT RANGE SAFETY
BRIEFING. ALL OTHERS USE BLANK AMMUNITION ONLY!
HC SMOKE IS NOT ALLOWED ON THE RANGE. SMOKE OR CS OF
ANY KIND IS NOT ALLOWED IN ANY BUILDINGS.
REMARKS
USE OF FLASH BANGS ON THE WALLS OR FLOORS WILL BE
DETERMINED ON A CASE-BY-CASE BASIS.
SIMUNITIONS AND GAS GUNS REQUIRE A RANGE FLAG.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
75
76
A-6
CONFIDENCE OBSTACLE COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 925085-A-COMPLEX-SW CORNER OF JUNCTION OF
GETTYSBURG AND CHAMPAGNE ROADS
(2.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL
COURSE CONSISTS OF 23 SEPARATE OBSTACLES VARYING FROM
FAIRLY EASY TO DIFFICULT.
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND
SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
A-302E OR A-302W CLASSROOMS CAN BE HAND RECEIPTED FROM
RANGE CONTROL, IF THEY ARE AVAILABLE.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
NO INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT WILL BE WORN BY PARTICIPATING
SOLDIERS (I.E. LBV, RUCK SACKS, WEAPONS, ETC.).
ONLY ONE SOLDIER AT A TIME WILL NEGOTIATE AN OBSTACLE,
UNLESS AN OBSTACLE IS DESIGNED FOR USE BY MORE THAN
ONE SOLDIER.
THE RANGE MUST HAVE AN OIC AND A RSO DUE TO THE
NATURE OF TRAINING.
68W/CERTIFIED EMT IS REQUIRED FOR THE RANGE DUE TO THE
NATURE OF TRAINING.
MEDICS MUST HAVE COMMO WITH THE RANGE. MEDICS MUST
HAVE WITH THEM ON THE RANGE A BACKBOARD AND “C”
COLLAR.
REMARKS
POC WILL BE FAMILIAR WITH FM 21-20 PHYSICAL FITNESS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
RISK ASSESSMENT IS REQUIRED TO BE TURNED INTO RANGE
CONTROL.
77
DESCRIPTIONS OF EACH OBSTACLE
OBSTACLE
THE TOUGH ONE
STATION 1
THE TANGLE FOOT
STATION 2
DIRTY NAME
STATION 3
DESCRIPTION
Soldiers climb the net on the high end of the obstacle. They go over or
between the logs and climb down the ladder; they go across the log
walkway and climb down the net to the ground. They jump over the
log cross member and go to the next station. (Require MATs)
Soldiers negotiate obstacle by running and stepping in the tires one
foot at a time, alternating every other foot.
Soldiers mount the low log and jump onto the next log. They grasp
over the top of the log with both arms, keeping the belly area in
contact with the log. They swing their legs over the log and go to the
next log in the same manner. From the last log they lower themselves
to the ground.
ISLAND HOPPER
STATION 4
Soldiers jump from one log to another until all logs are negotiated.
EASY BALANCER
STATION 5
Soldiers walk up one inclined log and down the one on the other side
of the ground.
BALANCING LOGS
STATION 6
Soldiers step up on a log and walk or run along it, keeping their
balance.
Soldiers may vault, jump or climb over the log. They must be warned
that it is not stationary. Soldiers must not roll or rock the log while
others are negotiating the obstacle.
Soldiers mount the lower log and then grasp two rungs of the ladder
and swing themselves into the air. They negotiate the length of the
ladder by releasing one hand at a time and swinging forward, grasping
a more distant rung each time.
Soldiers step on the lower log and assume the prone position on the
horizontal logs. They crawl over the logs to the opposite end of the
obstacle.
Soldiers approach the underside of the wall, jump and grasp the top,
and pull themselves up and over. They slide or jump down the incline
to the ground.
Soldiers step over each log, alternating their lead foot or using the
same ones.
Soldiers climb the reverse climb and go down the other side to the
ground.
THE BELLY BUSTER
STATION 7
THE TARZAN
STATION 8
BELLY ROBBER
STATION 9
INCLINING WALL
STATION 10
HIGH STEP OVER
STATION 11
REVERSE CLIMB
STATION 12
78
DESCRIPTIONS OF EACH OBSTACLE
JUMP AND LAND
STATION 13
Soldiers approach the obstacle from the ladder side. Climb the ladder to the
platform and drop to the ground.
WALK ACROSS
STATION 14
Soldiers step up on log and balance themselves as they walk the length of the
obstacle.
THE TOUGH NUT
STATION 15
Soldiers step over each X in the same line.
Soldiers move forward under the wire on their bellies to the end of the
obstacle. The direction of negotiating the crawl should be reversed from time
to time.
Soldiers gain momentum with a short run, grasp the rope, and swing their
bodies forward to the top of the cross member. They release the rope while
standing on the wall and jump to the ground.
BELLY CRAWL
STATION 16
SWING, STOP & JUMP
STATION 17
SIX VAULTS
STATION 18
VERTICAL WALL
STATION 19
TRENCH CRAWL
STATION 20
THE WEAVER
STATION 21
Soldiers vault over the logs, using one or both hands.
Soldiers approach the wall and pulls himself up to the top and over to the
other side.
Soldiers crawl on stomach through trench under the barbed wire. Only one
trench is necessary.
Soldiers move from one end of the obstacle to the other by weaving their
bodies under one bar and over the next. (Require MATs)
THE CONFIDENCE CLIMB
STATION 22
Soldiers climb the inclined ladder to the vertical ladder. They go to the top of
the vertical ladder, then down the other side to the ground. (Require MATs)
THE LOW BELLY-OVER
STATION 23
Soldiers mount the low log and jump onto the high log. They grasp over the
top of the log with both arms, keeping the belly area in contact with it. They
swing their legs over the log and lower themselves to the ground.
“The Weaver”
“The Tough One”
“Confidence Climb”
If using any of these obstacles on A-6 Confidence Course you must place mats down prior to use.
79
80
A-7
RAPPEL TOWER
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
UM 926085-A-COMPLEX-SE CORNER OF GETTYSBURG AND
CHAMPAGNE ROADS. (2.9 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
A 36 FT. HIGH RAPPEL TOWER WITH A 10’x 26” TOP DECK.
THE RAPPEL TOWER IS DESIGNED TO FACILITATE INDIVIDUALS
IN RAPPELING TECHNIQUES.
THE NORTH SIDE FEATURES SKID GEAR MOUNTED 3 FEET
BELOW THE DECK TO SIMULATE HELICOPTER OPERATIONS.
CLIFF SIMULATION IS PROVIDED ON THE WEST SIDE OF THE
TOWER, WHILE THE EAST SIDE OF THE TOWER HAS WINDOWS,
AS WELL AS A STRAIGHT WALL, FOR URBAN WARFARE
TRAINING.
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
RESTRICTIONS
A 13 FT. HIGH INCLINED PRACTICE TOWER IS AVAILABLE FOR
PRELIMINARY FAMILIARIZATION TRAINING.
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND
SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO, A-302E CLASSROOM MAY BE REQUESTED, IF AVAILABLE.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
OIC AND RSO MUST BE ON SAFETY MEMORANDUM FILED AT RANGE
CONTROL (See Table 1-1 Appendix I).
THE RANGE MUST HAVE AN OIC AND A RSO DUE TO THE NATURE OF
TRAINING.
68W/CERTIFIED EMT IS REQUIRED FOR THE RANGE DUE TO THE NATURE
OF TRAINING.
MEDICS MUST HAVE COMMO WITH THE RANGE AND RANGE CONTROL.
MEDICS MUST BE INFORMED THAT A BACKBOARD AND A C-COLLAR
ARE LOCATED IN THE WALL LOCKER AT THE BASE OF THE TOWER
LADDER.
REMARKS
OIC AND RSO WILL BE FAMILIAR WITH TC 21-24 RAPPELLING, DATED
09JAN08.
OIC AND RSO MUST INSPECT ALL RAPPEL EQUIPMENT FOR
SERVICEABILITY AT TIME OF ISSUE FROM RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR TO
RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING TRASH
DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH
RECEPTACLES.
RISK ASSESSMENT IS REQUIRED TO BE TURNED INTO RANGE CONTROL
81
82
A-9
M320 GRENADE LAUNCHER RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 917085-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
EACH LANE IS 30 METERS WIDE, 500 METERS LONG, AND HAS 4
FIRING POINTS.
PRACTICE TYPE AMMUNITION ONLY. ALL SHOTGUN
AMMUNITION UP TO, AND INCLUDING, 10 GAUGE.
TARGETS PERMANENTLY INSTALLED IAW FM 23-31
5 LANES
180 DEGREES MAGNETIC
BLACK/WHITE POLE
RED/WHITE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
AT EACH END OF THE FIRING LINE, TO PREVENT PERSONNEL
FROM ADVANCING BEYOND THE FIRING LINE DURING FIRING.
ALL FIRING MUST BE DOWN RANGE AND WITHIN THE LANE
BEING USED. NO INDIVIDUAL SHALL MOVE DOWN RANGE FROM
THE FIRING LINE.
Table 1-1 Appendix I of the CRTC Range Regulation and DA PAM 385-63
an E7 is required to be an OIC and an E6 is required to be an RSO.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
83
84
A-10
HAND GRENADE PRACTICE LANE AND QUALIFICATION COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
LATRINE FACILITIES
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 919085-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.3 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THE RANGE HAS A PRACTICE LANE CONSISTING OF 5 THROWING
STATIONS, AND A QUALIFICATION COURSE THAT CONTAINS 6
THROWING STATIONS AND 1 IDENTIFICATION STATION.
PRACTICE GRENADES ONLY
ALL TARGETS ARE PROVIDED
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
NEXT TO CHAMPANGE ROAD ON EAST SIDE OF THE RANGE
N/A
PRACTICE GRENADES ONLY. NO PERSONNEL IN FRONT OF THE
THROWING LINE WHEN PERSONNEL ARE ENGAGING TARGETS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
85
86
A-11
FERRELL LAKE LAND NAVIGATION COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 909086-AT THE INTERSECTION OF CODY AND CHAMPAGNE
ROADS. (3.9 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 52 POINTS WITH UNLIMITED CONFIGURATIONS,
AND IS USED FOR BASIC AND INTERMEDIATE LAND
NAVIGATION TECHNIQUES. THREE 100 METER PACE COUNT
LANES ARE ON SITE. THIS IS A SELF-CORRECTING COURSE.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
NONE
COURSE MATERIAL AVAILABLE AT RANGE CONTROL. 3 UNITS
CAN CO-USE THE RANGE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
87
88
A-12
SMALL ARMS 25 M ZERO RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 927087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE PROVIDES 25M ZERO AND REFLEXIVE FIRE
CAPABILITIES.
PISTOLS, SHOTGUNS, 5.56MM, AND 7.62MM BALL
REQUEST THROUGH RANGE CONTROL
PEA ROCK-32 FIRING POINTS
347 DEGREES MAGNETIC
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
YES- IN CLASSROOM
YES
NO
YES- 40 PERSON CAPACITY
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
N/A
PA SYSTEM IS LOCATED IN THE TOWER.
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND
RECEIPT TO MILITARY UNITS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
89
90
A-13
LITTER OBSTACLE COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 92350810-TRAIL TO THE WEST OF SOUTH GETTYSBURG ROAD,
NORTH OF C RANGE.
(3.0 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE PROVIDES MEDICAL PERSONNEL THE ABILITY TO
TRAIN AND TEST FOR THE EXPERT FIELD MEDICAL BADGE
(EFMB). THE COURSE CONSISTS OF 2 LANES WITH 8 OBSTACLES
EACH.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
UNITS CAN REQUEST THE A-3 EAST CLASSROOM, IF IT IS
AVAILABLE.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
N/A
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
91
92
A-14
LIVE FIRE FACILITY (SHOOT HOUSE)
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
UM 928087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD. EAST OF THE A-12
RANGE. (3.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS FACILITY OFFERS MULTIPLE TYPES OF TARGETRY FOR REALISTIC
TRAINING. OBSERVATION/CONTROLLER ROOM HAS DVD-R RECORDING
CAPABILITY. THREE UNITS CAN SIMULTANEOUSLY OCCUPY FACILITY,
WITH THE PROPER BARRIER DOORS CLOSED.
PISTOLS, SHOTGUNS, AND RIFLES UP THROUGH 7.62MM MATCH GRADE
PAPER AND E-TYPE SILHOUETTE. UNITS CAN BRING THEIR OWN, WITH
PRIOR APPROVAL FROM THE RANGE CONTROL OFFICER. LAZER SHOT
CONSISTS OF MULTIPLE PREPROGRAMED COMPUTER SCENERIOS
SHOWED ON LARGE VIDEO SCREENS. UNITS CAN USE LIVE OR LAZER
TYPE WEAPONS ON THESE SCREENS. CONTACT ATS FOR DETAILS.
N/A
360 DEGREES
YES-IN THE A-12 CLASSROOM
NO
YES-TARGETS AND EXTRA DOORS ARE STORED HERE
YES-A-12 CLASSROOM. 40 PERSON CAPACITY.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
A-14 CONTROL ROOM PHONE: 7765
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
NO FIRING ALLOWED AT THE CEILINGS, FLOORS, DOWN THE
STAIRWAYS, OR IN THE PERIMETER HALLWAYS.
A SITE VISIT IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED PRIOR TO PLANNING RANGE
USAGE, TO SEE THE FACILITY, AND ADDRESS TARGET PLACEMENT.
NOTE: A-14 LIVE FIRE FACILITY (SHOOT HOUSE) - USING
UNITS MUST HAVE THEIR OWN IBA WITH SAPPI PLATES, EYE
PROTECTION, AND EAR PROTECTION. SAPPI PLATES MAY BE
HAND-RECEIPTED FROM CENTRAL ISSUE FACILITY (CIF), 320616-2777.
OICs AND RSOs MUST HAVE COMPLETED A CERTIFIED OIC/RSO SHOOT
HOUSE COURSE PRIOR TO RANGE USAGE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR TO
RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING TRASH
DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH
RECEPTACLES.
93
94
95
A-15
FIELD LEADER REACTION COURSE (FLRC)
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 92540803-SOUTH GETTYSBURG ROAD.
(2.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THE A-15 IS A 7 HOUR PERIOD OF TRAINING. THE COURSE
CONSISTS OF 12 STATIONS THAT POSE DIFFERENT LEADERSHIP
PROBLEMS IN A TACTICAL SETTING. THE COURSE IS USED TO
EVALUATE A CANDIDATE’S LEADERSHIP POTENTIAL UNDER
FIELD AND SIMULATED COMBAT CONDITIONS.
C RANGE CLASSROOM MAY BE UTILIZED, IF IT IS AVAILABLE.
C RANGE CLASSROOM OR PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE
REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND SERVICES DIV, 320-6163128/3130.
SINCGARS: 3610O PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
THE RANGE MUST HAVE AN OIC AND A RSO DUE TO THE
NATURE OF TRAINING.
68W/CERTIFIED EMT IS REQUIRED FOR THE RANGE DUE TO THE
NATURE OF TRAINING.
MEDICS MUST HAVE COMMO WITH THE RANGE AND RANGE
CONTROL.
MEDICS MUST BE INFORMED HAVE WITH THEM ON THE RANGE
A BACKBOARD AND “C” COLLAR.
REMARKS
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
RISK ASSESSMENT IS REQUIRED TO BE TURNED INTO RANGE
CONTROL
96
97
BENNETT HILL
SKI AND TUBING HILL
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 93300872 (2.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THE HILL HAS 1-MAIN SKI/TUBING RUN, PLUS 3 ADDITIONAL SKI
RUNS. THE MAIN SKI AND TUBING RUN HAS A TOW ROPE. THE
HILL HAS 2 WARMING SHEDS. TUBES ARE PROVIDED.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
THE UNIT POC MUST RECEIVE A TOW ROPE MOTOR OPERATIONS
CLASS FROM RANGE CONTROL PRIOR TO OCCUPYING THE
RANGE.
MEDICAL SUPPORT MUST BE PRESENT ON THE RANGE (MINIMUM
CLS/FIRST RESPONDER)
AUTHORIZED ACCESS ROUTE: FROM RANGE CONTROL, GO WEST
ON ARGONNE ROAD, NORTH ON SOUTH GETTYSBURG ROAD,
THEN EAST ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD. PARKING AREA IS LOCATED
AT THE TOP OF THE HILL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
98
99
B-1
SMALL ARMS 25 METER ZERO RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 924164-NORTH RANGE COMPLEX ON NORTH GETTYSBURG
ROAD. (7.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
25M ZERO, MACHINE GUN FAMILIARIZATION, AND REFLEXIVE
FIRE
ALL SMALL ARMS
REQUEST THROUGH RANGE CONTROL
32 FIRING POINTS
269 DEGREES MAGNETIC
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
YES-NORTH RANGE-SOUTH CLASSROOM HAS LATRINE
FACILITIES. PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH
SUPPLY AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES-SANDBAGS AND SAFETY PADDLES ARE STORED IN THE
NORTH RANGE MAINTENANCE BUILDING. KEY TO THE BUILDNG
IS IN THE RANGE PACKET.
YES-NORTH RANGE-SOUTH CLASSROOM. 40 PERSON CAPACITY.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
NONE
THIS RANGE MUST BE PLACED INTO CHECKFIRE STATUS FOR
NORTH RANGE TARGET MAINTENANCE WHEN BOTH RANGES
ARE FIRING.
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND
RECEIPT TO MILITARY UNITS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
100
101
B-2
SMALL ARMS 25 METER ZERO RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
CLASSROOM/MESSHALL
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 924171-NORTH RANGE COMPLEX ON NORTH GETTYSBURG
ROAD. (7.9 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
25M ZERO, MACHINE GUN FAMILIARIZATION, REFLEXIVE FIRE,
AND MICLIC
ALL SMALL ARMS AND MICLIC
REQUEST THROUGH RANGE CONTROL
32 FIRING POINTS
266 DEGREES MAGNETIC
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
NONE
THIS RANGE SDZ CLOSES THE NORTH RANGE TARGET AREA.
THIS RANGE MUST BE PLACED INTO CHECKFIRE STATUS IF
NORTH RANGE NEEDS TO PERFORM TARGET MAINTENANCE.
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND
RECEIPT TO MILITARY UNITS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
102
103
B-2 SHOOT HOUSE
MOUT SITE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
CLASSROOM/MESSHALL
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 924171-NORTH RANGE COMPLEX ON NORTH GETTYSBURG
ROAD. (7.9 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS FACILITY OFFERS 3 ROOMS.
BLANKS AND SIMUNITIONS
N/A
NONE
N/A
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
YES-TARGETS AND EXTRA DOORS ARE STORED HERE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED FOR
SIMUNITIONS. RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
OIC AND RSO REQUIRED FOR BLANKS, SIMUNITIONS, AND GAS.
MUST BE ON WEAPON SAFETY CERTIFICATION MEMORANDUM
AND HAVE A CURRENT RANGE SAFETY BRIEFING.
ALL OTHERS USE BLANK AMMUNITION ONLY!
REMARKS
SMOKE OR CS OF ANY KIND IS NOT ALLOWED ON THE RANGE.
USE OF FLASH BANGS ON THE WALLS OR FLOORS IS
PROHIBITED.
SIMUNITIONS REQUIRE A RANGE FLAG.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
104
105
B-3
GETTYSBURG ROAD LAND NAVIGATION COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 925137 – AT THE INTERSECTION OF NORTH GETTYSBURG
AND NORMANDY ROADS. (5.7 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 33 POINTS, AND IS USED FOR INTERMEDIATE
TO ADVANCED LAND NAVIGATION TECHNIQUES.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
NONE
N/A
RANGE CANNOT BE OCCUPIED WHEN 7.62MM MATCH GRADE
AMMO IS BEING FIRED ON THE A-COMPLEX RANGES.
COURSE MATERIAL AVAILABLE AT RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
106
107
B-4
MOUNTED LAND NAVIGATION COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
VARIOUS STARTING POINTS
THIS COURSE HAS 6 PRE-DETERMINED ROUTES, WITH 4 POINTS
EACH. THE ROUTES HAVE DIFFERENT DEGREES OF DIFFICULTY.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
WHEN PERFORMING NIGHT OPERATIONS WITH NIGHT VISION
DEVICES, THE UNIT MUST HAVE AN OIC AND RSO ON SAFETY
CERTIFICATION MEMORANDUM, AND THEY MUST HAVE A
CURRENT RANGE SAFETY BRIEFING PRIOR TO OPENING THE
RANGE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
108
109
B-5
LAND NAVIGATION COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
CLASSROOM
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 941069-AT THE INTERSECTION OF ARGONNE AND FORT
RIPLEY ROADS. (1.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 34 POINTS WITH UNLIMITED CONFIGURATIONS,
AND IS USED FOR BASIC AND INTERMEDIATE LAND
NAVIGATION TECHNIQUES.
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
NONE
NONE
NONE
COURSE MATERIAL IS AVAILABLE AT RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
110
111
B-6
ENGINEER DIG SITE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 94180830-ON FT. RIPLEY ROAD
(1.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE OFFERS THE HEAVY CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
OPERATORS AN APPROVED MECHANICAL DIG AREA TO
PERFORM MOS TASKS IN.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
N/A
UNIT MUST BACKFILL ALL EXCAVATIONS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES..
112
113
B-7
LAND NAVIGATION COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
SP-1: UM 92950692
SP-2: UM 93120692
SP-3: UM 93460692
(1.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 37 POINTS WITH UNLIMITED CONFIGURATIONS.
USED FOR BASIC AND INTERMEDIATE LAND NAVIGATION
TECHNIQUES.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
N/A
COURSE MATERIAL IS AVAILABLE AT RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
114
115
B-8
TACTICAL MINE LANE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
UM 9418207469-ON FT. RIPLEY ROAD.
(1.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE OFFERS THE MINE DETECTOR (AN/PSS-14)
OPERATORS AN APPROVED LANE TO PERFORM MOS TASKS ON.
TRAINING LANES WILL BE USED TO TRAIN NEW OPERATORS
AND VALIDATE CURRENT OPERATORS.
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
TACTICAL LANES WILL BE USED TO DEMONSTRATE AND TRAIN
MISSION- OR THEATER-SPCIFIC MINE DETECTION TECHNIQUES
AND OPERATIONS.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
N/A
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
116
117
BREACH
LIVE-FIRE EXERCISE BREACH FACILITY
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL DIRECTION OF FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
UM 918158 – ENTER RANGE FROM BARRIER 31 ON NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD.
(7.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS FACILITY CONSISTS OF THREE STATIONS:
1) DOOR BREACHING STRUCTURE- 8 FEET HIGH FACADE WITH 33 X 80 INCH DOOR
2) WALL BREACHING STRUCTURE- 8 FEET HIGH X 20.5 INCHES FACADE
3) WINDOW BREACHING STRUCTURE- 8 FEET HIGH FACADE WITH A WINDOW
OPENING OF 32 3/4 INCHES X 38 3/4 INCHES
NO MORE THAN FOUR POUNDS OF C4; DETONATION CORD.
SHOTGUN FOR DOOR BREACHING ONLY
ALL UNITS MUST ORDER DOORS AND WINDOWS 90 DAYS IN ADVANCE. CIVILIAN
AGENCIES THAT UTILIZE THE RANGE MUST REPLACE THE DOORS AND WINDOWS
THAT THEY UTILIZE.
DO NOT PLACE CHARGES ON THE METAL STUDS AT STATION 2.
N/A
SEE SDZ LAYOUT
SEE SDZ LAYOUT
LATRINE FACILITIES
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS
OPEN-AIR CLASSROOM IS LOCATED ON THE RANGE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE ROAD
GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL. HOURLY
COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
ROAD GUARD WILL BE POSTED AT BARRIER 31, WITH COMMUNICATIONS TO THE
RANGE OIC.
BARRIER 31 WILL BE DOWN-NOT-LOCKED AFTER UNIT PASSES THROUGH IT.
A FIVE-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE CONTROL
FOR EACH TASK.
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING CALL MUST BE MADE TO RANGE CONTROL
FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO NOTIFY RANGE CONTROL AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
REMARKS
Per Ammunition Information Notice (AIN) 053-10, dated 10FEB10, DODIC: AA54 DOUBLE
HEARING PROTECTION (EARPLUGS AND MUFFS) AND EYE PROTECTION
(GOGGLES) SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDIERS FIRING THE SHOTGUN AND BY
SOLDIERS WITHIN 8.5 METERS OF THE WEAPON DURING DOOR BREACHING
OPERATIONS WHEN FIRING IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO REFLECTIVE SURFACE. ALL
SOLDIERS WITHIN 8.5 METERS TO 30 METERS OF THE FIRING POINT SHOULD
WEAR SINGLE HEARING PROTECTION (EARPLUGS OR MUFFS). REFERENCE TM 91005-338-13&P, TECHNICAL MANUAL UNIT AND DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE
MANUAL, MOSSBERG 12 GAUGE SHOTGUN, MODEL 500 AND MOSSBERG 12 GAUGE
SHOTGUN MODEL 590, MAY 2005.
METAL DOOR BREACHING IS CONSIDERED METAL CUTTING; REFER TO AR 386-63
FOR DETAILS. THE USING UNIT MUST PICK UP ALL BLAST FRAGMENTS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR TO RANGE
CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE
TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
118
119
C NBC Range
NBC MASKING PROFICIENCY RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 927080-SOUTH GETTYSBURG ROAD.
(2.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
AN NBC ORIENTED TRAINING AREA WITH CLASSROOM,
LATRINE, AND GAS CHAMBER.
CS GAS
N/A - DIRECTION OF ADVANCE IS SOUTH TO NORTH THROUGH
CHAMBER.
YES-IN THE CLASSROOM
YES
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
OIC AND RSO MUST BE ON SAFETY MEMORANDUM FILED AT
RANGE CONTROL (Table 1-1 Appendix I). MEDICAL AID
PERSONNEL MUST BE ON THE RANGE, OR AT ONE OF THE ACOMPLEX RANGES. MEDICS MUST HAVE COMMO WITH THE
RANGE.
OIC AND RSO WILL BE FAMILIAR WITH CHAPTER 15 OF THE
CAMP RIPLEY RANGE OPERATIONS APPENDIX. PERSONNEL NOT
PARTICIPATING IN COURSE TRAINING EXERCISES WILL REMAIN
ON THE UPWIND SIDE OF THE COURSE, AT A SAFE DISTANCE
FROM THE GAS FUMES OR SMOKE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
120
121
C1 IED RANGE_IED
IED PETTING ZOO
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
ANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 927080-SOUTH GETTYSBURG ROAD.
(2.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE PROVIDES A BASIC UNDERSTANDING OF IEDs AND
HOW THEY ARE EMPLOYED. THERE IS A STATIC DISPLAY OF
MUNITIONS IN THE C RANGE CLASSROOM.
AN OPEN AIR CLASSROOM IS ON SITE CONTAINING EXAMPLES
OF IEDS, EFPS, AND A VBIED. SEE RANGE PACKET AND RANGE
SOP FOR FURTHER DETAILS.
BLANK AMMUNTION ONLY
N/A
YES-IN THE CLASSROOM
YES
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
N/A
A LAPTOP AND A PROJECTOR CAN BE HAND-RECEIPTED FROM
RANGE CONTROL. THE LAPTOP CONTAINS A SLIDE
PRESENTATION OF THE LOCATION OF ALL IEDS ON THE LANE,
AS WELL AS VARIOUS VIDEOS AND OTHER TRAINING MATERIAL.
UNITS MUST NOT TAKE TRAINING AIDS TO DIFFERENT
LOCATIONS OTHER THEN THOSE ON THE IED RANGE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
122
123
CACTF
COMBINED ARMS COLLECTIVE TRAINING FACILITY
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
UM 939072-TA 10 (2.2 miles from Range Control)
The CACTF consist of 3 different sections that can be signed out
separately with 20 building types for various training needs.
SIMUNITIONS AND BLANKS
N/A
Portable toilets will be scheduled through supply and services,
320-616-3128/3130.
N/A
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: Hand Receipted with Range Packet.
Civilian Agencies / Military Organizations WILL open and close
the range with range control per radio communication. Hourly
radio checks are required only when utilizing SIMUNITIONs.
Use of NON-LIVE FIRE and/or BLANKS hourly radio checks
is not required, but radio communication must be continuously
monitored.
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
N/A
Under NO circumstances will units / civilian agencies allow
personnel to BIVOUAC within the structures. These structures
are for MOUT training purposes only.
POC/OIC/RSO must attend a range safety briefing prior to
training at the CACTF. The use of blanks, simunitions, and gas
there is an additional requirement that you must be on a safety
memorandum to conduct training at the CACTF.
HC SMOKE IS NOT ALLOWED ON THE RANGE.
SMOKE OR CS OF ANY KIND IS NOT ALLOWED IN
ANY BLDGS. USE OF FLASH BANGS ON THE WALLS
OR FLOORS IS PROHIBITED.
All using the CACTF WILL clean classrooms and police-call the
range prior to range clearance. The using organization is
responsible for hauling trash directly to the transfer station, or to
cantonment trash receptacles.
124
125
CLFX
CONVOY LIVE FIRE EXERCISE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE ROAD
GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
CASSINO ROAD-BETWEEN ANZIO ROAD AND KODIAK ROAD. START
POINT IS AT GRID UM 9212923103.
(11.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE PROVIDES, UNDER CONTROLLED CONDITIONS, A LIVE FIRE
EXERCISE FOR PATROL SIZE ELEMENTS CONDUCTING CONVOY
OPERATIONS. 83 AUTOMATED TARGETS ARE SET-UP ON THE RANGE.
SEE CLFX SOP FOR TARGET LOCATIONS. UNITS CAN USE DIFFERENT
TARGET SCENERIOS IF APPROVED BY RANGE CONTROL.
5.56 MM, 7.62 MM, .50 CAL., AND 40MM TP
TARGET REQUIREMENTS MUST BE SUBMITTED TO RANGE CONTROL
AND ATS 90 DAYS PRIOR TO EXECUTION. THE REMOTE CONTROLLER
MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS (320616-3132).
SEE RANGE MAP IN THE CLFX SOP FOR TARGET AREA LOCATIONS
360 DEGREES MAG AND 180 DEGREES MAG
SCENARIO DEPENDENT. TARGET MATRIX AND TRAINING SCENARIO
MUST BE APPROVED BY RANGE CONTROL.
SCENARIO DEPENDENT. TARGET MATRIX AND TRAINING SCENARIO
MUST BE APPROVED BY RANGE CONTROL.
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY ORDINATE PERMISSIBLE FOR .50 CAL. AND
BELOW.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND
SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
N/A
VICINITY OF THE OPEN-AIR CLASSROOM IN TA 58
OPEN-AIR CLASSROOM IN TA 58. GRID LOCATION IS UM 92622157.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
THERE ARE TWO FLAG POLES FOR THIS RANGE.
1) AT THE INTERSECTION OF ANZIO AND CASSINO ROAD.
2) AT THE INTERSECTION OF CASSINO AND KODIAK ROADS.
UNIT MUST HAVE ROAD GUARDS AT BOTH FLAG POLES, WITH COMMO
(MOTOROLA TALK-ABOUT RADIOS) TO THE OIC.
NOTICE: DUE TO BATWING SDZ USAGE REQUIREMENTS AND CURRENT
TARGET LOCATIONS, THIS RANGE IS LIMITED TO 7.62MM AND BELOW.
RFMSS RESERVATIONS THAT INCLUDE 7.62MM AMMUNITION WILL BE
HANDLED ON A CASE-BY-CASE BASIS, DEPENDENT ON THE FIELD
TRAINING AREA OPTEMPO, AND THE TARGET SCENARIO REQUESTED BY
THE UNIT.
CONVOY LIVE FIRE IS AUTHORIZED FOR EAST-TO-WEST TRAVEL ONLY.
(SEE CLFX SOP)
THE IPBC RANGE CLOSES THIS RANGE.
CLFX SOP IS AVAILABLE IN THE RANGE PACKET, OR FROM RANGE
CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR TO
RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING TRASH
DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH
RECEPTACLES.
126
Authorized Weapon Systems:
Engagement
Area
MK-19 Range
1 North
2 South
3 North Facade
4 South Facade
5 North Facades
6 South Truck
MK 19
5.56
M249
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
M2
7.62 mm
X
127
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CTF
COLLECTIVE TRAINING FACILITY
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 939072-TA 10 (2 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 7 CEMENT BLOCK STRUCTURES: SCHOOL,
HOTEL, BANK, AND 4 RESIDENCES TO PERFORM MOUT
OPERATIONS IN. THE HOTEL CAN BE UTILIZED FOR RAPPEL
OPERATIONS.
SIMUNITIONS AND BLANKS
N/A
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
BUILDING KEYS ARE HAND RECEIPTED FROM RANGE CONTROL
LOCKS ARE KEYED SEPARATELY.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL UNITS ALLOW PERSONNEL TO
BIVOUAC WITHIN THE STRUCTURES. THESE STRUCTURES ARE
FOR MOUT TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY.
OIC AND RSO REQUIRED FOR BLANKS, SIMUNITIONS, AND GAS.
MUST BE ON SAFETY CERTIFICATION ORDERS AND ATTEND A
RANGE SAFETY BRIEFING.
ALL OTHERS USE BLANK AMMUNITION ONLY.
HC SMOKE IS NOT ALLOWED ON THE RANGE. SMOKE OR CS OF
ANY KIND IS NOT ALLOWED IN ANY BLDGS. USE OF FLASH
BANGS ON THE WALLS OR FLOORS IS PROHIBITED.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
128
129
D
SHOTGUN/SHORT RANGE MARKSMANSHIP RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF FIRE
LEFT LIMIT: M4/M16
RIGHT LIMIT: M4/M16
LEFT LIMIT: SHOTGUN
RIGHT LIMIT: SHOTGUN
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
COVERED MESS
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE ROAD
GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 934120-NORTH OF DONALDSON ROAD, ON EAST BOUNDARY ROAD.
(3.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS A SPLIT FIRING LINE. NORTHERN-HALF IS SHOTGUN
QUALIFICATION. SOUTHERN-HALF IS 5.56MM ZERO/REFLEXIVE FIRE.
ALL SHOTGUN; 9MM-5.56MM
Will NOT support the usage of the new M855A1 5.56mm Enhanced Performance
Round (EPR).
TARGET STANDS WITH COROPLAST ARE ON THE RANGE. PAPER
TARGETS ARE AVAILABLE AT RANGE CONTROL.
20-SHOTGUN FIRING POINTS; 40-ZERO/REFLEXIVE FIRE POINTS
270 DEG MAG
B/W POLE
R/W POLE
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
LATRINE IS CONDEMNED. PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED
THROUGH SUPPLY AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES: FACILITY # 13303
NO
NO
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
5.56MM IS THE LARGEST AMMUNITION AUTHORIZED, AND CAN ONLY
BE FIRED ON THE SOUTHERN FIRING LINE.
SINGLE WEAPON SYSTEM USAGE ON ONE FIRING LINE: ONE OIC AND
RSO.
MULTIPLE WEAPON SYSTEM USAGE ON BOTH FIRING LINES: ONE OIC
AND RSO CERTIFIED ON ALL WEAPON SYSTEMS BEING FIRED, OR TWO
OICs AND RSOs CERTIFIED ON SPECIFIC WEAPON SYSTEMS.
REMARKS
Per Ammunition Information Notice (AIN) 053-10, dated 10FEB10, DODIC: AA54
DOUBLE HEARING PROTECTION (EARPLUGS AND MUFFS) AND EYE
PROTECTION(GOGGLES) SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDIERS FIRING THE
SHOTGUN AND BY SOLDIERS WITHIN 8.5 METERS OF THE WEAPON
DURING DOOR BREACHING OPERATIONS WHEN FIRING IN CLOSE
PROXIMITY TO REFLECTIVE SURFACE. ALL SOLDIERS WITHIN 8.5
METERS TO 30 METERS OF THE FIRING POINT SHOULD WEAR SINGLE
HEARING PROTECTION (EARPLUGS OR MUFFS). REFERENCE TM 9-1005338-13&P, TECHNICAL MANUAL UNIT AND DIRECT SUPPORT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL, MOSSBERG 12 GAUGE SHOTGUN, MODEL 500
AND MOSSBERG 12 GAUGE SHOTGUN MODEL 590, MAY 2005.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR TO
RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING TRASH
DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH
RECEPTACLES.
130
131
DEMO-1
M RANGE DEMOLITIONS SITE
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 916126-LOCATED ON M RANGE, SOUTH OF THE SRTR TARGET
AREA. (6.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
DEMOLITIONS TRAINING AREA TO SUPPORT METAL CUTTING,
CRATERING, AND ABATIS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS UP TO 100 LBS TNT EQUIVALENT.
BANGALORE TORPEDOES ARE LIMITED TO ½ KIT.
ANY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NEED TO BE COORDINATED WITH
RANGE CONTROL.
NA
NA
SEE MAP
SEE MAP
NA
NA
NA
NONE
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
BARRIER 9-THE BARRIER WILL BE DOWN-NOT-LOCKED. UNIT
WILL ENTER THE RANGE AT THIS BARRIER. ROAD GUARDS
MUST HAVE COMMO WITH THE RANGE OIC.
THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHARGE ON THE RANGE IS THE
EQUIVALENT OF 100 POUNDS OF TNT PER BLAST, 5 TIMES PER
YEAR, DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY, AND A MINIMUM OF 30
MINUTES BETWEEN BLASTS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS MUST BE PERFORMED WITHIN THE 4 ORANGE
PICKETS (LIMIT MARKERS).
A 5-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE
CONTROL FOR EACH TASK.
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE
CONTROL FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO, NOTIFY RANGE CONTROL
AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
REMARKS
THE RANGE CANNOT BE OCCUPIED IF THERE IS 7.62 MM FIRING
ON THE A-COMPLEX.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
132
133
DEMO-2
OP-2 DEMOLITIONS SITE
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 918157-LOCATED ON THE VONDERBAHN.
(7.8 MILES FORM RANGE CONTROL)
DEMOLITIONS TRAINING AREA TO SUPPORT METAL CUTTING,
CRATERING, AND ABATIS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS UP TO 100 LBS TNT EQUIVALENT.
BANGALORE TORPEDOES ARE LIMITED TO ½ KIT.
ANY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NEED TO BE COORDINATED WITH
RANGE CONTROL.
NA
NA
SEE MAP
SEE MAP
NA
NA
NA
NONE
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHARGE ON THE RANGE IS THE
EQUIVALENT OF 100 POUNDS OF TNT PER BLAST, 5 TIMES PER
YEAR, DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY, AND A MINIMUM OF 30
MINUTES BETWEEN BLASTS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS MUST BE PERFORMED WITHIN THE 4 ORANGE
PICKETS (LIMIT MARKERS).
A FIVE-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO
RANGE CONTROL FOR EACH TASK.
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE
CONTROL FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO, NOTIFY RANGE CONTROL
AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
REMARKS
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
134
135
DEMO-4
SEAL CABIN DEMOLITIONS SITE
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 9037625829-LOCATED ON THE SEAL CABIN RANGE.
(17.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
DEMOLITION TRAINING AREA TO SUPPORT METAL CUTTING,
CRATERING, AND ABATIS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS UP TO 100 LBS TNT EQUIVALENT.
BANGALORE TORPEDOES ARE LIMITED TO ½ KIT.
ANY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NEED TO BE COORDINATED WITH
RANGE CONTROL.
NA
NA
SEE MAP
SEE MAP
NA
NA
NA
NONE
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED.
AT RANGE ENTRANCE
AT BARRIER 68
THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHARGE ON THE RANGE IS THE
EQUIVALENT OF 100 POUNDS OF TNT PER BLAST, 5 TIMES PER
YEAR, DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY, AND A MINIMUM OF 30
MINUTES BETWEEN BLASTS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS MUST BE PERFORMED WITHIN THE 4 ORANGE
PICKETS (LIMIT MARKERS).
A FIVE-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO
RANGE CONTROL FOR EACH TASK.
REMARKS
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE
CONTROL FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO, NOTIFY RANGE CONTROL
AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
136
137
DEMO-5
LIGHT DEMOLITIONS RANGE
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 90092733-LOCATED IN TRAINING AREA 73.
(21.1 MILES RANGE CONTROL)
DEMOLITION TRAINING AREA TO SUPPORT METAL CUTTING,
CRATERING, AND ABATIS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS UP TO 100 LBS TNT EQUIVALENT.
BANGALORE TORPEDOES ARE LIMITED TO ½ KIT.
ANY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NEED TO BE COORDINATED WITH
RANGE CONTROL.
NA
NA
SEE MAP
SEE MAP
NA
NA
NA
NONE
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED.
AT RANGE ENTRANCE
AT RANGE ENTRANCE
THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHARGE ON THE RANGE IS THE
EQUIVALENT OF 100 POUNDS OF TNT PER BLAST, 5 TIMES PER
YEAR, DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY, AND A MINIMUM OF 30
MINUTES BETWEEN BLASTS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS MUST BE PERFORMED WITHIN THE 4 ORANGE
PICKETS (LIMIT MARKERS).
A FIVE-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO
RANGE CONTROL FOR EACH TASK.
REMARKS
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE
CONTROL FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO, NOTIFY RANGE CONTROL
AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
138
139
DEMO-6
TA 75 DEMOLITIONS SITE
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 907284-LOCATED IN TRAINING AREA 75.
(20.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
DEMOLITION TRAINING AREA TO SUPPORT METAL CUTTING,
CRATERING, AND ABATIS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS UP TO 100 LBS TNT EQUIVALENT.
BANGALORE TORPEDOES ARE LIMITED TO ½ KIT.
ANY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NEED TO BE COORDINATED WITH
RANGE CONTROL.
NA
NA
SEE MAP
SEE MAP
NA
NA
NA
NONE
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED.
AT RANGE ENTRANCE
BARRIER N-13 ON PUSAN ROAD
THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHARGE ON THE RANGE IS THE
EQUIVALENT OF 100 POUNDS OF TNT PER BLAST, 5 TIMES PER
YEAR, DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY, AND A MINIMUM OF 30
MINUTES BETWEEN BLASTS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS MUST BE PERFORMED WITHIN THE 4 ORANGE
PICKETS (LIMIT MARKERS).
A FIVE-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO
RANGE CONTROL FOR EACH TASK.
REMARKS
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE
CONTROL FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO, NOTIFY RANGE CONTROL
AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
140
141
DT-1
TRACKED VEHICLE DRIVER TRAINING COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 912063-LOCATED IN TA 2.
(4.2 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS COURSE IS 1.3 MILES LONG, AND OFFERS SEVEN LEFT
TURNS, FIVE RIGHT TURNS, THREE WOODED AREAS, SIX INCLINE
AREAS, AND TWO SOFT AREAS.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
ALL TRAINEES MUST HAVE A LICENSED OPERATOR IN THE
VEHICLE. FOR NIGHT DRIVER TRAINING WITH NVD USAGE, ALL
TRAINEES MUST HAVE A LICENSED NVD TRAINER WITH THEM.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
142
143
DT-2
TRACKED VEHICLE DRIVER TRAINING COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 875112-LOCATED IN TA 21.
(8.0 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS COURSE IS CONVENIENTLY LOCATED TO FACILITATE
DRIVER TRAINING WITH RANGE FIRING AT EAST, CENTER, AND
WEST RANGES. IT IS 4.4 MILES LONG, AND OFFERS A WATER
HAZARD, SPANNING DITCH, RAILCAR, AND A DIRT BERM.
YES-CENTER RANGE CLASSROOM
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
UNITS MAY SCHEDULE AND UTILIZE CRG CLASSROOM, IF
AVAILABLE.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
ALL TRAINEES MUST HAVE A LICENSED OPERATOR IN THE
VEHICLE. FOR NIGHT DRIVER TRAINING WITH NVD USAGE, ALL
TRAINEES MUST HAVE A LICENSED NVD TRAINER WITH THEM.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
144
145
DT-3
TRACKED VEHICLE DRIVER TRAINING COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 913135-LOCATED IN TA 27 WITHIN THE M RANGE.
(6.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS COURSE IS 1.9 MILES LONG. IT OFFERS EXCELLENT
VISIBILITY FOR OVERALL CONTROL OF THE COURSE DURING
USE. THE COURSE HAS FIVE LEFT TURNS, FIVE RIGHT TURNS,
TWO WOODED AREAS, FIVE INCLINE AREAS, AND THREE SOFT
AREAS.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
M, M-SRTR, AND DEMO-1 RANGES WILL CONFLICT WITH, AND
CLOSE THIS RANGE.
ALL TRAINEES MUST HAVE A LICENSED OPERATOR IN THE
VEHICLE. FOR NIGHT DRIVER TRAINING WITH NVD USAGE, ALL
TRAINEES MUST HAVE A LICENSED NVD TRAINER WITH THEM.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
146
147
EMERGENCY VEHICLE OPERATOR COURSE (EVOC)
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
UM 95400636 – SOUTH OF RANGE CONTROL: (.5 MILES SOUTH OF RANGE
CONTROL)
T1.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE EVOC FACILITY
A. THE EVOC IS A MULTI-AGENCY TRAINING FACILITY THAT ALLOWS
FOR SAFE PRACTICE OF EMERGENCY AND NON-EMERGENCY VEHICLE
OPERATION IN A CONTROLLED ENVIRONMENT SUPERVISED BY
TRAINED VEHICLE OPERATION STAFF. THE TRACK WAS DESIGNED FOR
SIMULTANEOUS TRAINING FOR MULTIPLE AGENCIES OR GROUPS
EITHER IN SEPARATE TRAINING COMPONENTS OR ONE LARGE MULTIAGENCY EXERCISE.
B. THE EVOC CONSISTS OF A 185 ACRE SITE WITH A 2.24 MILE EXTERIOR
PERIMETER TRACK.
C. TRACK COMPONENTS INCLUDE: SKID PAN, SKILL PAD, HIGH SPEED 4LANE ROAD, RURAL AREA 2—LANE ROAD AND GRAVEL ROAD.
D. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USING UNIT TO COORDINATE FOR
RESTROOM FACILITIES, WATER FACILITIES, CLASSROOMS, BILLETING
AND ALL OTHER SUPPLIES, INCLUDING FUEL, SAFETY PARAPHERNALIA,
FOOD, TRANSPORTATION, SUN-BLOCK, INSECT REPELLENT, ETC
E. CAMP RIPLEY DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS IS RESPONSIBLE FOR
LAWN CARE/MAINTENANCE AS WELL AS ROAD MAINTENANCE AND
SNOW REMOVAL ON THE TRACK.
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
BLANK/SIMUNITIONS/LESS-LETHAL
LATRINE FACILITIES
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND
SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE (USE OF SIMUNITIONS REQUIRES A RANGE
FLAG)
NO TRACK VEHICLES
REFER TO THE EVOC SOP FOR SPECIFICS REGARDING THE EVOC
THERE IS A SEPARATE SAFETY BRIEFING AT RANGE CONTROL
REQUIRED TO BE AN OIC/RSO FOR THE EVOC
EVOC requires a MOS qualified Medic (68W) for military units and a Certified EMT
for non-military units. NO EXCEPTIONS!!!
148
149
F RANGE
BIATHLON COURSE AND 25M ZERO RANGE
LOCATION
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
UM 906098-ON CODY ROAD.
(4.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS IS A SKI AND SHOOT RANGE CONSISTING OF A SERIES OF SKI
TRAILS, A 50 METER .22 CAL. RIFLE RANGE, AND A 25M ZERO RANGE
FOR 5.56MM. THIS RANGE IS THE SITE FOR THE NATIONAL GUARD
BUREAU (NGB) BIATHLON CHAMPIONSHIPS. IT FEATURES 3 MILES OF
BITUMINOUS TRACK FOR YEAR-ROUND TRAINING.
.22 CAL., 5.56MM, AND ALL STANDARD PISTOL AMMUNITION
This range will NOT support the usage of the new M855A1 5.56mm Enhanced
Performance Round (EPR).
BIATHLON: OFFICIAL BIATHLON LARGE AND SMALL BORE TARGETS
FIRING LINE
25M ZERO: TARGET STANDS WITH COROPLAST BACKING. TARGETRY IS
AVAILABLE AT RANGE CONTROL.
BIATHLON: 31 FIRING POINTS
GENERAL DIRECTION OF FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
25M ZERO: 29 FIRING POINTS
29 DEGREES MAGNETIC
POINTS 1-31 BLACK AND WHITE POLE, AT 31DEGREES MAGNETIC.
LEFT LIMIT
POINTS 32-60 RED AND WHITE POLE, AT 31DEGREES MAGNETIC.
POINTS 1-31 RED, WHIITE, AND BLUE POLE AT 21DEGREES MAGNETIC.
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
TIMERS HOUSE
WARMING AND WAXING
HUTS
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE ROAD
GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
POINTS 32-60 BLACK AND WHITE POLE AT 21DEGREES MAGNETIC.
YES
YES
YES
YES-23 HUTS
YES-100 PERSON CAPACITY
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
AS REQUIRED TO PROHIBIT PERSONNEL FROM ADVANCING BEYOND
FIRING LINE, OR INTERFERING WITH SKIERS ON TRAILS.
ONLY .22 CAL. AMMUNITION WILL BE FIRED AT THE METAL BIATHLON
TARGETS. THIS RANGE CLOSES CODY ROAD.
BIATHLON TARGETS MUST BE REPAINTED PRIOR TO RANGE
CLEARANCE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR TO
RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING TRASH
DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH
RECEPTACLES.
150
151
152
F RANGE
TACTICAL TRAINING BASE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
LATRINE FACILITIES
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
WARMING SHEDS
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 906098-ON CODY ROAD.
(4.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
TACTICAL TRAINING BASE
BLANKS ONLY
IN CLASSROOM
IN CLASSROOM
WARMING SHEDS MAY BE UTILIZED AS SLEEPING ROOMS
YES-100 PERSON CAPACITY
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
VEHICLES ARE NOT AUTHORIZED ACCESS THROUGH THE GREEN
GATE. VEHICLES ARE NOT AUTHORIZED ACCESS TO THE TRAIL
NETWORK. TENTS MAY BE SET UP IN THE OPEN AREA TO THE
SOUTH OF THE TIMING SHED AND THE RING OF FLAGS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
153
154
FARP
FORWARD ARMING AND RESUPPLY POINT
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 869109 TRAINING AREA 18. SOUTH OF LUZON ROAD.
(7.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
LARGE OPEN FLAT AREA WITH A BERM.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
NO TRACKED VEHICLES ARE ALLOWED WITHIN THE SPECIFIED
LANDING ZONE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
155
156
F&M 1
FIRE AND MOVEMENT RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 921191 (8.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
F&M 1 CONSISTS OF A 197m SPLIT PATH THAT MEANDERS
THROUGH AN OAK FORESTED AREA, WITH 38 REMOTECONTROLLED, BATTERY OPERATED, POP-UP TARGETS ON THE
PATH.
PISTOLS, SHOTGUNS, SUB-MACHINE GUNS, AND 5.56MM
REMOTE CONTROLLER MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH
AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS (ATS), 320-616-3132/3133.
N/A
270 DEGREES MAGNETIC
200 DEGREES MAGNETIC
340 DEGREES MAGNETIC
N/A
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
NOTICE: DUE TO BATWING SDZ USAGE REQUIREMENTS AND
THE CURRENT TARGET LOCATIONS, THIS RANGE IS NOW
LIMITED TO TARGETS 7-10 ONLY (BOTH NORTH AND SOUTH
LANES).
NO CROSSFIRING AT TARGETS ON OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE LANE
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
157
158
F&M 2
FIRE AND MOVEMENT RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 933113-LOCATED ON EAST BOUNDARY ROAD.
(3.3 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
F&M 2 CONSISTS OF A 100m PATH THAT MEANDERS THROUGH A
BRUSHY AREA, WITH 10 REMOTE CONTROLLED, BATTERY
OPERATED, POP-UP TARGETS.
9MM, .45 CAL., SHOTGUNS, AND SUB-MACHINE GUNS.
REQUEST REMOTE CONTROLLER THROUGH AUTOMATED
TARGET SYSTEMS (ATS), 320-616-3132/3133.
N/A
300 DEGREES MAGNETIC
324 DEGREES MAGNETIC
216 DEGREES MAGNETIC
N/A
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
NO CROSSFIRING AT TARGETS ON OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE LANE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
159
160
HAND GRENADE RANGE (HGR) (LIVE GRENADE FAMILIARIZATION)
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
L RANGE-UM 918161
THIS RANGE GIVES SOLDIERS THE EFFECTS, EXPERIENCE,
AND CONFIDENCE IN HANDLING LIVE GRENADES. THE RANGE
ALSO HAS A PRACTICE THROWING BAY. (8.0 MILES FROM
RANGE CONTROL)
M67 FRAGMENTATION HAND GRENADE
PERMANENTLY INSTALLED
2 THROWING PITS
320 DEGREES MAGNETIC
N/A
N/A
N/A
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NONE
NONE
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE ENTRANCE TO L RANGE
BARRIER 29-AT THE ENTRANCE TO L RANGE
UNIT MUST COMPLETE HAND GRENADE QULIFICATION ON A-10
RANGE, AND MOCK BAY FAMILIARIZATION PRIOR TO
THROWING LIVE GRENADES.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
RANGE SOP IS IN THE RANGE PACKET.
161
162
INFANTRY PLATOON BATTLE COURSE (IPBC)
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
TA 57 (10.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE PROVIDES, UNDER CONTROLLED CONDITIONS, A
LIVE FIRE EXERCISE FOR INFANTRY PLATOONS WITH
ARMOR/MECH SUPPORT. IT CONSISTS OF TWO MANEUVER
LANES (LIGHT AND HEAVY) WITH BUNKER AND TRENCH
SYSTEMS. INDIRECT FIRE WEAPONS ARE SIMULATED BY THE
USE OF DEMOLITION CHARGES AND SMOKE POTS, OR CAN BE
INCORPORATED INTO A CALFEX SCENARIO. THE RANGE ALSO
HAS AN OPEN-AIR CLASSROOM AND A PRACTICE LANE.
UP TO 7.62 MM AT THE BUNKER SITES. .50 CAL., 25 MM, AND
120MM FOR THE HEAVY MANEUVER LANE FINAL OBJECTIVE. 40
MM ON THE MK-19 RANGE LIGHT MANEUVER LANE.
TARGET MATRIX MUST BE APRROVED BY RANGE CONTROL OIC.
REMOTE CONTROLLED TARGET LIFTERS NEED TO BE
REQUESTED THROUGH AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS (320-6163132/3133).
FIRING BY ATTACKING TROOPS IS LIMITED TO THE VICINITY OF
EACH OBJECTIVE. SUPPORTING MACHINE GUN FIRE IS FROM
ESTABLISHED SUPPORT-BY-FIRE (SBF) POSITIONS.
270 DEGREES MAG. TO 360 DEGREES MAG.
SCENARIO DEPENDENT. TARGET MATRIX AND TRAINING
SCENARIO MUST BE APPROVED BY RANGE CONTROL.
SCENARIO DEPENDENT. TARGET MATRIX AND TRAINING
SCENARIO MUST BE APPROVED BY RANGE CONTROL.
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY ORDINATE PERMISSIBLE FOR .50 CAL.
AND BELOW. 5 DEGREES FOR TANK AND BFV.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
VICINITY OF THE OPEN-AIR CLASSROOM
OPEN-AIR CLASSROOM IS LOCATED AT UM 927215
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
UM 92732141 (BARRIER 40). ENTRANCE TO THE TROUT POND.
BARRIER 40 WILL BE DOWN-NOT-LOCKED FOR UNIT ACCESS TO
THE RANGE. UNIT MUST POST A ROAD GUARD AT THIS BARRIER
WHEN THE RANGE IS LIVE FIRING.
THE CLFX RANGE CLOSES THIS RANGE. SEE RANGE SOP FOR
FURTHER RESTRICTIONS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
163
164
165
166
167
168
ISBC
INFANTRY SQUAD BATTLE COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
UM 88272886 (20.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
This Course, comprised of 5 Objectives, is used to train and test infantry squads on the
skills necessary to conduct tactical movement techniques; and detect, identify, engage,
and defeat stationary and moving infantry and
armor targets in a tactical array
Primary features include—
6 stationary armor targets
1 moving armor target
20 stationary infantry target
6 moving infantry targets
2 trench obstacles
5 machine gun/observation bunkers (with sound effects simulator)
All targets are fully automated, and the event-specific target scenario is computerdriven and scored from the range operations center
The range operating system is fully capable of providing immediate performance
feedback to the using participants
Requirement Document: FM 3-21.8, ARTEP 7-8 Drill, TC 7-9
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL DIRECTION OF FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE ROAD
GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
7.62MM & BELOW
PERMANENT TARGET LIFTERS
135 DEGREES MAGNETIC
ORANGE ARROW ON EACH OBJECTIVE
GREEN ARROW ON EACH OBJECTIVE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
YES – NORTH END OF CLASSROOM
YES
YES – 30 PERSON CAPACITY
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
BARRIER N16, ENTRANCE TO ISBC
BARRIER N16 WILL BE DOWN-NOT-LOCKED FOR UNIT ACCESS TO THE
RANGE. UNIT MUST POST ROAD GUARDS AT THIS BARRIER AND THE
CHAIN BARRIER TO THE NORTH OF THE CLASSROOM WHEN THE RANGE
IS LIVE FIRING.
COMPUTER SCENARIO CHANGES MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH
AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS NLT 72 HRS PRIOR TO RANGE USAGE.
FOR TARGETRY PROBLEMS CALL ATS, PHONE# 3132/3133
TARGET SCENARIO MUST BE SUBMITTED TO RANGE CONTROL NLT 90
DAYS IN ADVANCE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR TO
RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING TRASH
DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH
RECEPTACLES.
169
170
J
FIELD FIRING RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
TARGET BLDG
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
INTERIOR RANGE CONTROL
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 910148 – NORTH END OF CODY ROAD.
(7.7 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE IS A MULTI-PURPOSE FAMILIARIZATION RANGE
SMALL ARMS, MACHINE GUNS, MORTARS, MK-19 (TP-T ONLY),
AND DIRECT LAY ARTILLERY
TARGETS INCLUDE: AUTO BODIES, BARRELS, TANK HULLS,
ROCK PILES, AND APCs PRESENTLY IN THE IMPACT AREA.
SPECIFIC TARGET REQUIREMENTS MUST BE COORDINATED WITH
RANGE CONTROL.
23 TOTAL FIRING POINTS.
FP-1 HAS 8 FIRING POINTS
FP-2 HAS 15 FRING POINTS
343 DEGREES MAGNETIC FOR SMALL ARMS UP TO .50 CAL.
352 DEGREES MAGNETIC FOR SMALL ARMS UP TO .50 CAL.
310 DEGREES MAGNETIC FOR SMALL ARMS UP TO .50 CAL.
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY ORDINATE PERMISSIBLE FOR .50 CAL.
AND BELOW, OTHER WEAPON SYSTEMS REQUIRE AN RC FORM 1
FROM RANGE CONTROL.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
IN CENTER OF THE RANGE
TEMPORARY BARRIERS WILL BE PUT IN PLACE BY RANGE
CONTROL, AT THE TOP OF THE HILL. UNIT MUST POST BARRIER
GUARDS WHEN FIRING.
AT ENDS OF FIRING LINE PREVENTING PERSONNEL FROM
ADVANCING AHEAD OF THE FIRING LINE, OR INTO BACK BLAST
AREA, WHILE FIRING IS BEING CONDUCTED.
ALL FIRING MUST BE CONTROLLED SO THAT ALL ROUNDS ARE
DIRECTED INTO THE IMPACT AREA BETWEEN THE LEFT AND
RIGHT LIMITS. OIC OR RSO MUST HAVE A COMPASS TO VERIFY
LIMITS LISTED ON THE APPROPRIATE SDZ OVERLAY
INFORMATION CARD.
TWO UNITS (OR TWO WEAPON SYSTEMS) CAN OCCUPY THIS
RANGE AT ONE TIME, ONE ON FP1, AND THE OTHER ON FP2.
WHEN TWO UNITS ARE ON THE RANGE AT THE SAME TIME, THEY
MUST TELL RANGE CONTROL WHICH FIRING POINT THEY ARE
ON, WHEN SENDING THEIR OPENING CHECKLIST.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
171
172
K
FIELD FIRE RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LIMIT MARKERS
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
TARGET BLDG
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 912233-LOCATED ON CASSINO ROAD, NORTH OF OP-15. (12.5
MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE IS SITUATED IN AN OPEN FIELD UTILIZING
STATIONARY TARGETS AT VARIOUS DISTANCES INTO THE
LEACH IMPACT AREA. THE RANGE ALSO HAS A 10M/25M
ZERO/TRANSITION FIRING LINE.
ALL SMALL ARMS, 40MM (TP ONLY), BFV, MORTAR, AT-4,
DRAGON GUIDED MISSILE (TRAINING AND HEAT), JAVELIN
(INERT ONLY), AND TOW (INERT ONLY).
TARGETS INCLUDE AUTO BODIES, BARRELS, TANK HULLS, ROCK
PILES, AND APCs PRESENTLY IN THE TARGET AREA.
PORTABLE TARGET STANDS WITH COROPLAST BACKING ARE ON
SITE FOR THE ZERO/TRANSITION FIRING LINE.
LOCATED ON THE CEMENT PAD
01 DEGREE MAGNETIC
SEE SDZ LAYOUT FOR LIMITS OF FIRE
WEAPON SPECIFIC MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT PERSONNEL FROM ADVANCING
AHEAD OF THE FIRING LINE, AND FROM ENTERING SPECIFIC
WEAPON BACKBLAST AREAS.
THE CLFX AND IPBC RANGES CLOSE THIS RANGE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
173
174
L
ENGINEER DEMOLITION RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
AMMUNITION STORAGE
BUNKER
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 902144-WEST OF CODY ROAD AND BARRIER 29.
(7.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
DEMOLITION TRAINING AREA TO SUPPORT METAL CUTTING,
CRATERING, AND ABATTIS. CONTAINS A BUNKER WITH
VIEWING PORTS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS UP TO 200 LBS.
ANY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NEED TO BE COORDINATED WITH
RANGE CONTROL.
NA
NA
SEE MAP
SEE MAP
NA
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
EMPLACE TO ENSURE PERSONNEL DO NOT ENTER DANGER AREA
WHILE FIRING.
LARGE CHARGES, 100 LBS. OR LARGER, WILL BE DETONATED IN
THE LARGE CHARGE AREA ONLY. MAX. CHARGE IS 200 LBS.
REPORT ANY DAMAGED VIEWING PORTS IN OBSERVATION
BUNKER.
A 5-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE
CONTROL FOR EACH TASK.
REMARKS
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING CALL MUST BE MADE TO
RANGE CONTROL FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO NOTIFY RANGE
CONTROL AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
175
176
M
25M ZERO/SHOTGUN QUAL/
SCALED SRTR MORTAR RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 915133-LOCATED ON NORMANDY ROAD.
(6.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS A SCALED SHORT RANGE TRAINING ROUND
MORTAR RANGE, AS WELL AS A 16 LANE 25M AND 35M ZERO
LINES.
SHOTGUN; 9MM-7.62MM BALL; MORTAR SRTR ROUNDS
SCALED TARGETS AT 100, 150, 200, 300, 350, 400, 500, AND 600
METERS
100 METER FRONT
171 DEGREES MAGNETIC
185 DEGREES MAGNETIC / GREEN POLE
157 DEGREES MAGNETIC / ORANGE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY ORDINATE PERMISSIBLE
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
IN CENTER OF RANGE
N/A
IF 7.62MM MATCH GRADE AMMO IS BEING FIRED ON A-1 KD
RANGE, THIS RANGE CANNOT BE OCCUPIED.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
177
178
179
MK-19
MK-19 MULTI-PURPOSE GUNNERY RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 925232-LOCATED ON CASSINO ROAD.
(12.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THE RANGE OFFERS PRACTICE TARGET OBSERVATION, FIRE
ADJUSTMENT, TRAVERSING, SEARCHING, AND OBTAINING AN
ACCURATE TARGET FOR BOTH GROUND AND VEHICLE
MOUNTED WEAPONS.
MK-19 40 MM TP ONLY
400m APC; 600m APC; 600m TROOPS (TP ONLY); 800m TANK; 800m
TROOPS (TP ONLY); 1100m TANK; 1500m CEV
50 METER
12 DEGREES MAGNETIC
ORANGE POLE / 22 DEGREES MAGNETIC
GREEN POLE / 353 DEGREES MAGNETIC
15 DEGREES
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
HIGH EXPLOSIVE ROUNDS ARE UNAUTHORIZED FOR THIS
RANGE. OP-23 IS THE ONLY AUTHORIZED RANGES FOR MK-19 40
MM HE ROUNDS.
OIC AND RSO WILL BE FAMILIAR WITH FM 23-27 MK-19 GRENADE
MACHINE GUN.
REPORT ALL DUD ROUNDS TO RANGE CONTROL WITH CLOSING
CHECKLIST.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
180
181
R RANGE
VEHICLE RECOVERY SITE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
VEHICLES AVAILABLE ON
SITE
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE ROAD
GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 926055-NORTH OF CHICKAMAGUA ROAD, WEST OF SOUTH
GETTYSBURG ROAD. (3.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
TYPE OF RECOVERY ACTIVITIES AVAILABLE AT SITE:
UPRIGHT AND OVERTURNED WHEELED AND TRACKED
VEHICLES. AKERRS (ALLIED KINETIC ENERGY RECOVERY ROPE
SYSTEM) PIT. NOSED IN VEHICLE (WHEELED AND TRACKED).
TOW WHEELED AND TRACKED VEHICLE (CROSS-COUNTRY).
LIFT AND SWING LOAD. MIRED WHEELED AND TRACKED
VEHICLE (RECOVERY PIT).
M-60 TANK(2), M880,TRK,UTIL(1), M151A2TRK, CRG(1) ,M54 (1)
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
NONE
N/A
TRACK VEHICLE RECOVERY REQUIRES AN INDIVIDUAL WITH A
VALID DA FORM 348 FOR M60 SERIES TRACK VEHICLE
OPERATION.
THE RANGE PACKET AND THE KEYS FOR THE RANGE GATE,
BUILDING, AND EQUIPMENT LOCATED ON THE RANGE WILL BE
SIGNED FOR AT RTS-MAINTENANCE SUPPLY SECTION, BLDG 11200.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
ALL COORDINATION FOR THIS RANGE WILL BE DONE THROUGH
RTSM. SAME DAY REQUEST IS NOT AUTHORIZED THROUGH
RANGE CONTROL, CONTACT RTSM.
THE RECOVERY RANGE IS REQUESTED THROUGH RFMSS, ONCE
INPUTTED, CONTACT RTSM WITH A PLAN, UPON APPROVAL
RTSM WILL NOTIFY THE RFMSS SCHEDULER TO RESERVE THE
RANGE.
182
183
REACT TO CONTACT LANE
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
UM 95522711 (TA 64) – INTERSECTION OF CHORWAN AND
WONSAN ROADS.
(15 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THE LANE CONSISTS OF SEVERAL IED-DEFEAT TRAINING
OPPORTUNITIES, INCLUDING A PEDESTRIAN OVERPASS,
UNDERPASS, BARRIERS, AND A SMALL VILLAGE. THE LANE
SUPPORTS USAGE BY ALL MILITARY VEHICLES. RANGE USAGE
CAN BE INCORPORATED WITH OTHER MOUT FACILITIES, OR
ELSEWHERE DOWN RANGE.
Y-4 TACTICAL TRAINING BASE (TTB) IS LOCATED DIRECTLY
SOUTH OF THIS RANGE, TO FURTHER ENHANCE THE AREA OF
OPERATIONS (AO).
CIVILIAN CONTRACTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR RANGE
OPERATIONS AND EQUIPMENT, AND HAVE MULTIPLE PREWRITTEN SCENARIOS AVAILABLE. UNITS CAN ALSO REQUEST
THE CONTRACTORS TO WRITE SPECIFIC SCENARIOS FOR THE
OWN TRAINING NEEDS.
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF OE-254
ANTENNA MAST
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
ALL BLANK AMMUNITION, PYROTECHNICS, AND SIMUNITIONS
COORDINATE WITH THE CIVILIAN CONTRACTORS
N/A
N/A
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
IN Y-4 TTB
N/A
NONE
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
184
REACT TO CONTACT LANE
185
SCALED RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
RADIO FREQUENCIES
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 9021806969 - TA05: FIELD TO THE SOUTH OF FERRELL LAKE.
(3.22 MILES WEST OF RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE OFFERS THE ABILITY FOR MOUNTED WEAPON
SYSTEMS TO USE TRAINING DEVICES (I.E. MILES, PGS, TWGSS,
ETC.) ALLOWING COMMANDERS THE ABILITY TO TRAIN CREWS
PRIOR TO MOUNTED LIVE FIRE TRAINING EVENTS.
BLANK ONLY
EIGHT STATIONARY TARGET LIFTERS AND TWO MOVING
TARGETS. TARGET LIFTERS CAN BE PLACED ANYWHERE ON THE
RANGE FROM 100-1200 METERS. CURRENT MOVING TARGET
LOCATION IS AT 600 METERS. TARGETS ARE ¼ AND ½ SCALES.
N/A
N/A
N/A
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
N/A
N/A
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
ADMIN: 40.025
FIRING: 32.050
JUMP: 41.550
NONE
TARGET MATRIX MUST BE SUBMITTED TO AUTOMATED TARGET
SYSTEMS 120 DAYS PRIOR.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
186
SEAL CABIN
NON-STANDARD SMALL ARMS RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 902261-NORTH FROM BARRIER 68.
(17.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE CONSISTS OF A RANCH STYLE CABIN SITUATED IN A
WILDERNESS AREA. NUMEROUS SCENARIOS CAN BE
CONDUCTED AT THIS SITE.
PISTOL, SHOTGUN, 5.56MM, 7.62MM, AND DEMOLITIONS
PAPER SILHOUTTE TARGETS CAN BE OBTAINED THROUGH
RANGE CONTROL. REMOTE CONTROLLED TARGETRY NEEDS TO
BE COORDINATED THROUGH AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS
(ATS), 320-616-3132/3133.
SCENARIO DEPENDENT
5.56MM, 360-DEGREE SWING SDZ IS ALLOWED, UPON PRIOR
APPROVAL FROM RANGE CONTROL.
SCENARIO DEPENDENT
SCENARIO DEPENDENT
SCENARIO AND AMMUNITION DEPENDENT
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
NONE
SCENARIO DEPENDENT
ALL SCENARIOS MUST BE SUBMITTED TO RANGE CONTROL NLT
90 DAYS PRIOR TO SCHEDULED USAGE.
OIC AND RSO REQUIRED FOR BLANKS, SIMUNITIONS, AND GAS.
REMARKS
NO FIRING AT THE CEILING OR ROOF.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
187
188
UAC
URBAN ASSAULT COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE ROAD
GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 92581674-LOCATED ON NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD BETWEEN
NORTH RANGE AND B-2. (7.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
This facility is used to train individual Soldiers, squads, and platoons on tasks
necessary to operate within a built-up/urban area.
Primary features include—
Station 1: Individual and Team Trainer. This station is a three-room trainer where
team leaders and squad leaders train the basics of building and room clearing.
Station 2: Squad and Platoon Trainer. This station is a four-structure trainer with
multiple rooms. Squads build upon tasks learned at Station 1 and begin to learn the
concepts of clearing multiple buildings. The station is designed in such a way that it
can be used as individual buildings with a narrow street or as rooms inside a building
with a long connecting hallway.
Station 3: Grenadier Gunnery Trainer. This station is a live-fire station where M203
gunners master target engagements in an urban area, move tactically, and respond to
the fire commands.
Station 4: Offense/Defense House. This station is where a platoon can train to attack
and/or defend a building. This station can also be divided into a number of smaller
training stations to reinforce training or to train tasks not yet trained at the other
stations.
Station 5: Underground Trainer. This station provides training for subterranean
operations.
5.56MM AND 40MM TP
PROVIDED ON THE RANGE
STATION 3 IS A ONE FIRER LANE ONLY
STATION 3: 283 DEGREES MAGNETIC
STATION 3 ONLY: CEDAR POST WITH RED LIGHT
STATTION 3 ONLY: CEDAR POST WITH RED LIGHT
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY PER AMMUNITION
YES-IN THE CLASSROOM BUILDING ON NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND
SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
YES-ACROSS NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD. TWO EACH, WITH 40 PERSON
CAPACITY.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
THIS RANGE MUST BE PLACED INTO CHECKFIRE STATUS FOR NORTH
RANGE TARGET MAINTENANCE
FOR TARGETRY PROBLEMS CALL ATS, PHONE # 3132/3133
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND RECEIPT TO
MILITARY UNITS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR TO
RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING TRASH
DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH
RECEPTACLES.
189
190
Viking Ski Trail
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
FROM DE PARQ WOODS TO THE CODY ROAD ENTRANCE OF THE F
RANGE BIATHLON TRAIL NETWORK
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
N/A
NO COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR USE OF THIS TRAIL
HOWEVER, USING UNIT MUST STOP BY RANGE CONTROL AND
CHECK IN WITH THE NUMBER OF PERSONNEL UPON ENTERING
AND CHECK OUT UPON EXITING.
RANGE CONTROL PHONE#: 320.616.3134/3137
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
SKIING ON THE DOWN RANGE PORTION OF THE TRAIL IS
PERMITTED DURING RANGE CONTROL HOURS OF OPERATION
ONLY. SKIIERS MUST SIGN IN AND OUT AT RANGE CONTROL.
THEY MUST ALSO READ AND SIGN A WAIVER OF LIABILITY
AGREEMENT.
SKIIERS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR KEEPING THE TRAIL NEAT AND
CLEAN.
191
192
W-1
FERRELL LAKE PONTOON BRIDGE SITE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
CLASSROOM
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 904075-LOCATED ON THE SOUTH SIDE OF FERRELL LAKE. (3.2
MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS SITE PROVIDES A LAKE SITE FOR BRIDGE AND AMPHIBIOUS
SWIM TRAINING.
167 METERS
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
OIC AND RSO MUST BE ON SAFETY MEMORANDUM FILED AT
RANGE CONTROL (see Table 1-1 Appendix I). MEDICAL AID
PERSONNEL MUST BE ON THE RANGE. OIC AND RSO MUST BE
FAMILIAR WITH CHAPTER 2.
THE RANGE CAN BE USED FOR VEHICLE SWIMMING AND
PONTOON BRIDGING. THE UNIT PROVIDES ALL EQUIPMENT.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
193
194
W-2
MISSISSIPPI RIVER RIBBON BRIDGE SITE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
LATRINE FACILITIES
STORAGE BLDG
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 937124-LOCATED ON EAST BOUNDARY ROAD, ON THE
MISSISSIPPI RIVER. (4.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS SITE IS CONSIDERED A FAST WATER SITE FOR RIBBON
BRIDGE TRAINING, AND IS UNIQUE IN THE UNITED STATES.
116 METERS FROM SUPPORT RAMP TO SUPPORT RAMP.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
OIC AND RSO MUST BE ON SAFETY MEMORANDUM FILED AT
RANGE CONTROL (SEE LE 1-1, K). MEDICAL AID PERSONNEL
MUST BE ON THE RANGE. OIC AND RSO MUST BE FAMILIAR
WITH CHAPTER 2.
THE MISSISSIPPI RIVER VARIES GREATLY IN RATE OF FLOW,
DEPENDING ON THE SEASON AND CURRENT WEATHER
CONDITIONS. CURRENT DATA CAN BE OBTAINED FROM
MINNESOTA POWER (1-800-228-4966).
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
195
196
MILLER COMPLEX
NORTH, EAST, CENTER,
AND WEST RANGES
197
Automated Tower Radio
Frequencies
NOTE: WRG FREQUENCIES IN THE
LIST BELOW NO LONGER APPLY, WITH
THE RANGE TYPE CHANGING FROM
MPTR TO MPMG. THE RANGE WILL
USE 36.100 AND 36.900 ONLY.
198
199
200
201
NORTH RANGE (NRG)
MULTI-PURPOSE MACHINE GUN RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 924166-LOCATED ON NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD. PART OF
THE E.B. MILLER COMPLEX. (7.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 6 LANES; LANES 2-5 HAVE TARGETS OUT TO
1500M.
25MM, .50 CAL., 7.62MM, and 5.56MM
PROVIDED ON THE RANGE
6 FIRING POINTS-EITHER GROUND OR VEHICLE MOUNTED
WEAPONS.
283 DEGREES MAGNETIC
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY PER AMMUNITION
YES-IN THE CLASSROOM BUILDING ON NORTH GETTYSBURG
ROAD
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND
SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
NO
YES-ACROSS NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD. TWO EACH, WITH 40
PERSON CAPACITY.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT PERSONNEL FROM ADVANCING
AHEAD OF THE FIRING LINE.
THIS RANGE CAN ONLY BE FIRED FROM THE ESTABLISHED
FIRING LINE. IF THE B-1 RANGE IS FIRING, NO PERSONNEL ARE
ALLOWED TO GO WEST OF THE FIRING LINE.
IF TARGET MAINTENANCE IS REQUIRED DURING RANGE
OPERATIONS, B-1 AND THE UAC MUST BE PLACED INTO
CHECKFIRE STATUS PRIOR TO ANY DOWNRANGE MOVEMENT.
FOR TARGETRY PROBLEMS CALL ATS, 320-616-3132/3133
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
202
203
EAST RANGE (ERG)
MULTI-PURPOSE TRAINING RANGE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE FREQUENCIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
INTERIOR RANGE
CONTROL
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 895135-LOCATED IN THE E.B. MILLER COMPLEX ON
NORMANDY ROAD. (6.7 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE OFFERS TANK AND BFV QUALIFICATION LES IV-XII.
THE RANGE CAN SUPPORT A MLRS OPAREA.
120 MM, 25 MM, 20 MM, TOW (inert), 50 CAL., 7.62 MM, 5.56 MM.
DOUBLE E SILHOUETTES AND ARMOR TARGETS.
4 MANEUVER LANES, 16 DEFENSE POSITIONS & FIRING POINTS.
3 DEGREES MAGNETIC
VARIOUS TRPS WITH ORANGE ARROW.
VARIOUS TRPS WITH ORANGE ARROW.
5° FOR TANKS, 15° FOR BFVs, AND MAX ORDINATE FOR .50 CAL.
AND BELOW.
YES-IN THE CLASSROOM
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND
SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
YES
YES-40 PERSON CAPACITY
SEE CRTC APPROVED FRQUENCIES LIST ON PAGE 199
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
USING UNIT WILL POST GATE GUARD AT THE TOWER GATE
WHEN THE RANGE IS HOT.
AS NEEDED ELSEWHERE AROUND THE RANGE PERIMETER
NORMANDY ROAD CLOSED. ALTERNATE ROUTE IS SOUTH (OR
NORTH) ON CODY ROAD, TO LLANO GRANDE, TO THE RANGE
ROAD.
AMMO SUPPLY POINT AND REFUELING POINT MUST BE
SEPARATED BY AT LEAST 300 METERS.
TARGET MATRIX MUST BE SUBMITTED TO RANGE CONTROL NLT
90 DAYS IN ADVANCE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
204
205
CENTER RANGE (CRG)
MULTI-PURPOSE TRAINING RANGE (MPTR)
LOCATION
CONTROL TOWER-UM885125.
(7.7 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL ON NORMANDY ROAD)
RANGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION
206
WEST RANGE (WRG)
MULTI-PURPOSE MACHINE GUN RANGE/HEAVY SNIPER LANE
LOCATION
UM 865145-INTERSECTION OF NORMANDY ROAD AND BATAAN ROAD. (9.7 MILES
FROM RANGE CONTROL)
This range is used to train and test Soldiers on the skills necessary to zero, detect,
identify, engage, and defeat stationary and moving infantry targets along with
stationary armor targets in a tactical array
using the M249 squad automatic weapon (SAW), M60 MG, M240B MG, MK19, M24
sniper weapon system, M110 semi-automatic sniper system and the M2 MG.
DESCRIPTION
Primary features include—
98 stationary infantry targets.
24 double target arm – stationary infantry targets.
24 moving infantry targets emplacements.
20 stationary armor targets.
10 firing lanes.
10 Target boots.
20 iron maiden targets
Note: 26 stationary infantry emplacements are widened to support two target
mechanisms.
All targets are fully automated and the event-specific target scenario is computerdriven and scored from the tower. The range operating system is fully capable of
providing immediate performance feedback to the using participants.
Associated range operations and control facilities:
Standard SAROCA facilities
Requirement document: FM 3-22.27, FM 3-22.10, FM 3-22.65, FM 3-22.68
Additional information: Targets beyond 1,000 meters can be battery powered/radio
controlled. All stationary/moving infantry target mechanisms are equipped with
muzzle flash simulators. Target boots will be placed 10 meters from the baseline.
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL DIRECTION OF FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE ROAD
GUARDS
UP TO .50 CAL API
PERMANENT TARGET LIFTERS
10 DEGREES MAGNETIC NORTH
TRP 1 < ORANGE ARROW
TRP 6 > ORANGE ARROW
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
YES – LOCATED IN CLASSROOM
YES
YES
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
TELEPHONE: 3137/3134
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL. HOURLY
COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
86064 13532 RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
RESTRICTIONS
COMPUTER SCENARIO CHANGES MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH AUTOMATED TARGET
SYSTEMS NLT 72 HRS PRIOR TO RANGE USAGE
REMARKS
FOR TARGETRY PROBLEMS CALL ATS, PHONE #3132/3133
TARGET SCENARIO MUST BE SUBMITTED TO RANGE CONTROL NLT 90 DAYS IN ADVANCE
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR TO RANGE
CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER
STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
207
208
TACTICAL TRAINING
BASES (TTB)
INCLUDING COMBAT OUTPOSTS
209
NORTH RANGE ENTRY CONTROL POINT
(NRG ECP)
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM/MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 93091673-WEST OF THE CODY ROAD/EAST BOUNDARY ROAD
INTERSECTION. (7.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
ENTRY CONTROL POINT TRAINING
BLANKS ONLY
IN CLASSROOM BUILDING, OR PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE
REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND SERVICES DIV, 320-6163128/3130.
YES: 2 CLASSROOMS-40 PERSON CAPACITY EACH
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: MAY BE HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
UNIT WILL NOT CLOSE NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD WHEN
CREATING A TEMPORARY TACTICAL TRAINING BASE.
OTHER UNITS MUST BE ALLOWED EASE OF ACCESS TO B-1,
NORTH, AND B-2 RANGES; AND WILL NOT BE SUBJECTED TO ANY
SCENARIO TRAINING BEING CONDUCTED BY THE OCUPPYING
UNIT.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
210
211
Y-1
POW CAMP/TACTICAL TRAINING BASE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
CLASSROOM
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 936079-LOCATED ON ARGONNE ROAD.
(1.0 MILE FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS SITE PROVIDES TRAINING ON HANDLING AND
CONTROLLING PRISONERS OF WAR, OR DETENTION OF
PERSONNEL IN A SECURED ENVIRONMET. COMPOUND CONSISTS
OF FENCED AREAS WITH TOWER PLATFORMS AND TIN HUTS.
THE RANGE CAN ALSO BE UTILIZED AS A COMBAT OUTPOST.
SIMUNITIONS, BLANK AMMUNITION, AND PYROTECHNICS
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
NO GRAY WATER DUMPING OR MKTs ALLOWED ON THIS RANGE
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
212
213
Y-2 EAST
TACTICAL TRAINING BASE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
CLASSROOM
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 90560539 AND UM 89730600-LOCATED ON BULL RUN AND
SHILOH ROADS, IN TA 3. (3.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
COMPOUND PERIMETERS ARE HESCO BASKET WALLS.
INFRASTRUCTURE INCLUDES 2 ECPs EACH, TOWER PLATFORMS,
AND TIN HUTS. RANGE ALSO HAS AN OE-254 ANTENNA MAST
AND “BIG VOICE/SIREN” SPEAKER SYSTEM.
SIMUNITIONS, BLANK AMMUNITION, AND PYROTECHNICS
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
GRAY WATER FACILITIES ARE IN PLACE FOR MKTs AND
SHOWERING. OBTAIN THE WRENCH FROM RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CALL RANGE CONTROL FOR PUMPING GRAY
WATER.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
214
Y-2 WEST
TACTICAL TRAINING BASE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
CLASSROOM
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 90560539 AND UM 89730600-LOCATED ON BULL RUN AND
SHILOH ROADS, IN TA 3. (3.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
COMPOUND PERIMETERS ARE HESCO BASKET WALLS.
INFRASTRUCTURE INCLUDES 2 ECPs EACH, TOWER PLATFORMS,
AND TIN HUTS. RANGE ALSO HAS AN OE-254 ANTENNA MAST
AND “BIG VOICE/SIREN” SPEAKER SYSTEM.
SIMUNITIONS, BLANK AMMUNITION, AND PYROTECHNICS
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
GRAY WATER FACILITIES ARE IN PLACE FOR MKTs AND
SHOWERING. OBTAIN THE WRENCH FROM RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CALL RANGE CONTROL FOR PUMPING GRAY
WATER.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
215
216
Y-4
TACTICAL TRAINING BASE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
CLASSROOM
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 95462646-LOCATED ON CHORWAN ROAD, IN TA 64.
(14 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
COMPOUND HAS ELECTRIC POWER INSTALLED. PERIMETER
STYLE IS DIRT BERM. GRAY WATER DRAIN FIELD AND
MAINTENANCE PADS ARE INSTALLED. UNIT WILL HAVE TO
SUPPLY TENTAGE TO SIMULATE BUILDINGS. OE-254 ANTENNA
MAST IS LOCATED ON THE IED-D LANE.
SIMUNITIONS, BLANK AMMUNITION, AND PYROTECHNICS
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
GRAY WATER FACILITIES ARE IN PLACE FOR MKTs AND
SHOWERING. OBTAIN THE WRENCH FROM RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CALL RANGE CONTROL FOR PUMPING GRAY
WATER.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
217
218
Appendix B
RISK MANAGEMENT
Appendix B offers the current form used to calculate the risk involved in any training exercise. All
personnel in leadership positions should be familiar with Deliberate Risk Assessment Worksheet (DA
Form 2977) procedures. Leaders are encouraged to use these forms along with common sense to
determine the risk and safety of all exercises. A risk management worksheet is required to be turned
into Range Control prior to going down range and is a requirement for all downrange activities.
219
220
221
Appendix C
ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT REPORTING FORMS
RANGE ACCIDENT/INCIDENT CHECKLIST
Vehicle / Barrier / Training Area
RANGE INCIDENT CHECKLIST
Indirect Fire
ACCIDENT / INCIDENT REPORT ATS FORM 285-AB-R (FEB 2014)
222
RANGE ACCIDENT/INCIDENT CHECKLIST
Vehicle / Barrier / Training Area
DATE_______________________
1. Notify Range Control: SINCGARS 36.100, Motorola radio, or Telephone 320-616-3134 or 320-412-6075.
2. Report the nature of accident/incident and have information available.
 Vehicle accident/incident
Date and time of incident: ______________________________________________________________
Type of accident/incident: _____________________________________________________________
Personnel injured:
Yes
No
Vehicle damage:
Yes
No
Grid: ______________________________________________________
Activity being conducted: ______________________________________________________________
Name of individual and unit reporting: ____________________________________________________
 Barrier breach
Barrier # ____________or Grid:_______________ Damaged:
Yes No
Date and time of incident: ______________________________________________________________
Duration in area: _____________________________________________________________________
Number and type of vehicles involved: ___________________________________________________
Number of personnel involved: _________________________________________________________
Name and unit of individual in charge: ____________________________________________________
 Damage to Training Area or property
Damage was caused by:
Tracked Vehicle Wheeled Vehicle
Troop use
Fire
Other _______________________________
Training Area #_______ and Grid_______________________________
Approximate amount of damage:________________________________
Engineer equipment required: YES
NO
TYPE:____________________
Personnel reporting and unit.: ___________________________________________________________
3. Stand by for instructions from Range Control.
4. If accident/incident warrants investigation, Range Control may request unit to submit ATS Form 285-ABR (Accident/Incident Report).
223
RANGE INCIDENT CHECKLIST
Indirect Fire
1. Immediately place the firing point in Cease Fire Freeze status.
2. All personnel will fall away from weapons without changing settings.
3. Notify Range Control on SINCGARS 36.100 immediately and give the following
information:
 Name of unit. ______________________________________________________________
 Grid location of weapon round was fired from ____________________________________
 Type and size of round ______________________________________________________
 Azimuth, Elevation, and Charge _______________________________________________
Round was:
 Out of Safe
 Unobserved
 Name and Rank of person reporting incident _____________________________________
4. OIC investigates to determine:
 Personnel injured
 Equipment Damage
 General direction (out of limit) that weapon was fired ___________________________
 Number of rounds fired ___________________________________________________
 Personnel were forward of established firing position
 Number of personnel forward of firing position ________________________________
 Reason forward of position ________________________________________________
5. Stand by for instructions from Range Control investigating.
6. If accident/incident warrants investigation, Range Control may request unit
to submit ATS Form 285-AB-R (Accident/Incident Report).
7. Firing will be resumed upon approval from Range Control.
224
RANGE INCIDENT CHECKLIST
Direct Fire
1. Immediately place the firing point in Cease Fire Freeze status.
2. All personnel will fall away from weapons without changing settings.
3. Notify Range Control: SINCGARS 36.100, Motorola radio, or Telephone 320-616-3134
or cell phone 320-412-6075:
 Range Designation: ______________________________________________________
 Name of unit: ___________________________________________________________
 Name and rank of person reporting incident: __________________________________
 Type of incident: ________________________________________________________
 OIC investigation results: _________________________________________________
4. OIC investigates to determine:
 Personnel injured
 Equipment Damage
 General direction (out of limit) that weapon was fired ___________________________
 Number of rounds fired ___________________________________________________
 Personnel were forward of established firing position
 Number of personnel forward of firing position ________________________________
 Reason forward of position ________________________________________________
5. Stand by for instructions from Range Control.
6. If accident/incident warrants investigation, Range Control may request unit
to submit ATS Form 285-AB-R (Accident/Incident Report).
7. Firing will resume upon approval from Range Control.
225
ACCIDENT / INCIDENT REPORT
(Items derived from AGAR DA Form 285-AB-R FEB 2009)
1. DATE / TIME OF ACCIDENT / INCIDENT (1):_____________________________________________
2. UNIT (5):__________________________________________________________________________
3. LOCATION OF ACCIDENT / INCIDENT (6):______________________________________________
4. MISSION (BRIEF DESCRIPTION) (8):___________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
5. INDIVIDUAL(S) INVOLVED (11):
NAME (LAST, FIRST, MI)
SOCIAL SEC. #
6. WERE PERSONNEL HOSPITALIZED? (21)
GRADE
SEX
AGE
YES / NO (CIRCLE ONE)
7. DESCRIBE ACCIDENT/INCIDENT (24):_________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
8. WAS ACCIDENT / INCIDENT CAUSED BY (CIRCLE ALL THAT APPLY) (37):
LEADER
TRAINING
STANDARDS/PROCEDURES
SUPPORT
INDIVIDUAL
DESCRIBE: ________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
9. CORRECTIVE ACTIONS TAKEN OR PLANNED (40):______________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
10. POC FOR INFORMATION ON ACCIDENT / INCIDENT (41):________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
(INCLUDE NAME, RANK, POSITION, UNIT, HOR, AND PHONE NUMBERS)
11. HAS AN ATS FORM 47A BEEN COMPLETED IF THE INDIVIDUAL WAS TREATED AT A CIVILIAN
MEDICAL FACILITY? YES / NO / NA (CIRCLE ONE)
12. WAS A COPY LEFT AT THE MEDICAL FACILITY, CAMP RIPLEY MUTF (TMC), AND RANGE
CONTOL? YES / NO / NA (CIRCLE ONE)
(NUMBERS IN PARENTHESES ARE THE LINE ITEM NUMBER ON DA FORM 285-AB-R)
ATS FORM 285-AB-R (FEB 2014)
226
Appendix D
ZULU MAST MAP
227
Mast
Z-1
Z-2
Z-3
Z-4
Z-5
Z-6
Z-7
Z-8
Z-9
Z-10
Z-11
Z-12
Location
Range Control Office
A-1
Training Area 61
Training Area 64
Training Area 71
Training Area 69
OP 16
OP 15
Training Area 54
Training Area 40
OP 1
Range Control Office
228
Coordinates
UM 95370686
UM 91990868
UM 95082437
UM 95512711
UM 88122886
UM 86802508
UM 90142468
UM 91332287
UM 87102204
UM 85381612
UM 91001464
UM 95370686
Appendix E
IMPROVED LANDING AREAS MAP
229
HELIPAD NO.
X-1
X-2
X-2A
X-3
X-4
X-5
X-5A
X-6
X-6A
X-7
X-8
X-9
X-10
X-10A
X-11
X-12
X-12A
GRID LOCATION.
UM 956054 (MUTF)
UM 935090 (TA 13)
UM 922084 (TA 9)
UM 937125 (TA 28)
UM 924177 (TA 34)
UM 929229 (TA 58)
UM 958273 (TA 64)
UM 882251 (TA 68)
UM 884290 (TA 72)
UM 875221 (TA 55)
UM 855164 (TA 40)
UM 869136 (TA 40)
UM 890135 (TA 38)
UM 902125 (TA 25)
UM 898061 (TA 3)
UM 941057 (Air Field)
UM 954066 (Range Control)
LATITUDE / LONGITUDE
460534.05N
0942100.48W
460737.45N
0942240.89W
460718.75N
0942345.62W
460924.73N
0942238.22W
461215.01N
0942238.22W
461502.10N
0942323.61W
461726.31N
0942105.07W
461616.69N
0942703.63W
461823.39N
0942659.90W
461426.74N
0942744.06W
461131.14N
0942904.33W
461000.12N
0942808.28W
460959.55N
0942618.52W
460931.19N
0942521.69W
460559.65N
0942533.93W
460547.99N
0942212.14W
460623.69N
0942111.90W
230
Appendix F
DROP ZONES
231
ARNO DZ
AIR DROP ZONE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
FLIGHT PATH DIRECTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 873249-INTERSECTION OF KODIAK ROAD AND ARNO ROAD.
18.3 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL.
PROVIDES TRAINING ON AIR ASSAULT, AIRBORNE, AND
LOGISTICAL SUPPORT OPERATIONS. DROP ZONE IS 1100M WIDE
BY 1000M LONG.
SOUTH TO NORTH
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND
SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
DZ CREW IS RESPONSIBLE FOR LIMITING ACCESS TO THE DZ
DURING AIRDROPS.
AVOID OVERFLYING FARMS TO THE WEST OF THE DROP ZONE.
PERSONAL FLOTATION DEVICES ARE REQUIRED FOR PERSONNEL
DROPS, DUE TO NUMEROUS PONDS LOCATED WITHIN THE DZ.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
232
233
KALAHAR DZ
AIR DROP ZONE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
FLIGHT PATH DIRECTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
AIRFIELD INFORMATION
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
MILLER ARMY AIRFIELD
PROVIDES TRAINING ON AIR ASSAULT, AIRBORNE, AND
LOGISTICAL SUPPORT OPERATIONS. DROP ZONE IS 600M WIDE
BY 1577M LONG.
SOUTHEAST TO NORTHWEST OR NORTHWEST TO SOUTHEAST
YES-INSIDE AIRFIELD OPERATIONS OFFICE
NA-ALL COMMUNICATIONS ARE CONTROLLED BY MILLER ARMY
AIRFIELD OPERATIONS OFFICE
ASSAULT STRIP HAS 2’ X 6’ PANELS MARKING BOTH SIDES OF
THE RUNWAY DOWN THE ENTIRE LENGTH. MAIN RUNWAY HAS
2’ TALL MARKER LIGHTS ON THE SHOULDERS, AS WELL AS
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT LOCATED AT VARIOUS POINTS ON THE
AIRFIELD. UNIT MUST BRIEF JUMPERS ON THESE HAZARDS.
NA
THE AIR FORCE RECOMMENDS SINGLE SHIP VISUAL DROPS AS
THE DZ DOES NOT HAVE A SUFFICIENT WIDTH FOR FORMATIONS
OR SKE DROPS.
LEFT TRAFFIC IS RECOMMENDED TO AVOID ZMP R-4301 TO THE
NORTH OF THE DZ. MUST ALSO AVOID OVERFLYING RANDALL,
MN, WEST OF THE AIRFIELD.
REMARKS
AIRCRAFT MUST USE ASSAULT STRIP TO ENSURE JUMPERS LAND
SOUTH OF THE MAIN RUNWAY, TO AVOID AIRFIELD
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT NORTH OF THE RUNWAY.
USE OF THIS DROP ZONE MUST BE COORDINATED THROUGH
CAMP RIPLEY OPERATIONS, 133 AW, MILLER ARMY AIRFIELD
OPERATIONS, AND CAMP RIPLEY RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
234
235
RIPLEY DZ
AIR DROP ZONE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FLIGHT PATH
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 914135-NORTHEAST CORNER OF NORMANDY ROAD AND
CODY ROAD INTERSECTION. 6.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL.
PROVIDES TRAINING ON AIR ASSAULT, AIRBORNE, AND
LOGISTICAL SUPPORT OPERATIONS. DROP ZONE IS 1100 METERS
WIDE BY 1100 METERS LONG.
SOUTHWEST TO NORTHEAST.
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND
SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED, BUT
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
ALL FOUR ROAD/TRAIL INTERSECTIONS WILL BE BARRICADED
ONE HOUR PRIOR TO TIME ON TARGET, TO ENSURE THAT THERE
ARE NO UNAUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ON THE DZ.
DZ CREW WILL CLOSE NORMANDY ROAD AT THE APPROPRIATE
TIME.
N/A
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO
CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
236
237
Appendix G
AUTHORIZED WHITE LIGHT ROAD MAP
238
239
Appendix H
RANGE CONTROL FORMS
Weapon Safety Certification Memo
Range Pre-Operation Checklist
Camp Ripley Exception to Policy Request
Camp Ripley Target Matrix
Request to Camp in the Field Training Area
and/or Cantonment
Explosive Ordnance Incident Report
240
Weapon Safety Certification Memorandum
Training Center Support Unit
National Guard Training and Community Center
15000 Highway 115
Little Falls, MN 56345-0150
MNAG-TCSU
1 May 2014
MEMORANDUM FOR: RANGE CONTROL, CAMP RIPLEY, LITTLE FALLS, MN
SUBJECT: SAFETY CERTIFICATION
1. I certify that the following individuals have been trained, tested, and are weapons systems certified for the
weapons indicated.
2.
NAME
Doe, John S.
Smith, Robert
Johnson, Mark
GRADE/
RANK
E-7/SFC
E-6/SSG
E-5/SGT
SSNLAST FOUR
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
WEAPON SYSTEMS
M1A1, M2, M249, M9, Rappel Tower
M16A1, M9
M16A1, M9
JOHN T. HOME
LTC, IN, MNARNG
Battalion Commander
THIS IS A SAMPLE
The memorandum must include:
a. Grade/Rank requirements are found in Table 1-1 Appendix I. ROTC Cadets, OCS Students, WOCs, or any
Officer or Warrant Officer who has not completed OBC/WOBC are not authorized to be OICs or RSOs.
b. The specific weapon system(s) that the individual has been certified on.
c. The memorandum must be signed by an O-5 (O-4P) Commander or above.
241
RANGE PRE-OPERATION CHECKLIST
The Range Pre-Operation Checklist can be used as a guide to ensure the basic requirements of this regulation are
completed, prior to arrival at Camp Ripley, to conduct live-fire training.
COMPLETED BY THE TRAINING SECTION:
Range Assignment_______________________________ Date_________________ Time____________
Weapon(s) to be fired____________________________________________________
Course of fire__________________________________________________________
Number of personnel to fire______________ Number of rounds needed_________________
Coordination of transportation______________________________________________
COMPLETED BY THE COMPANY COMMANDER:
OICs and RSOs have completed the Battalion Range Safety Certification program__________________
OICs and RSOs are weapon systems certified:
YES
/
NO
Weapon Safety Certification Memorandum sent to Range Control by the Battalion on________________
COMPLETED BY THE OFFICER IN CHARGE (OIC):
Appoint a RSO (must be certified by the BN Commander)______________________________________
Appoint ARSOs as needed______________________________________________________________
Range Control Safety Briefing at Range Control is scheduled for_________________________________
Coordination for Medical Support has been completed_________________________________________
Coordination for Communication Equipment has been completed________________________________
Coordinated with Automated Target Systems for targets and materials, and has submitted any
scenario changes prior to range usage_____________________________________________________
COMPLETED BY THE RANGE SAFETY OFFICER (RSO):
Has a copy of the Camp Ripley Range Operations Appendix_______
Has a copy of all applicable FMs and TMs for the weapon systems being used_______
Has a range specific safety briefing prepared for firing and range support personnel________
242
Camp Ripley Exception to Policy Request
UNIT:_______________________________
DATE:__________________________
MEMORANDUM FOR: Camp Ripley Range Control Office
SUBJECT: Exception to Policy
POLICY:
EXCEPTION TO POLICY:
DURATION OF THE EXCEPTION:________________________________________________________
REQUESTER’S PRINTED NAME, RANK, AND POSITION
SIGNATURE
1. THE ABOVE REQUEST IS:_________APPROVED _________DISAPPROVED
DATE:______________________________
2. COMMENTS:
______________________________________________________
RANGE CONTROL OFFICER
DISTRIBUTION:
REQUESTER-1
SHIFT SERGEANT-1
243
CAMP RIPLEY TARGET MATRIX
UNIT:
RANGE:
RANGE DATES:
FROM:
TO:
GUNNERY TABLE:
TASK/ EVENT
NUMBER
BATTLE
POSITION OR
LANE #
REFERENCE:
AMMO
DODIC
EXPOSURE
TIME AND HITS
TO KILL
RANGE TO
TARGETS
TARGET
REQUIREMENTS
TARGET AVAILABILITY
PRIMARY/ALT
PREPARED BY:
DATE:
SDZ CREATED BY:
DATE:
LEFT LIMIT:
RIGHT LIMIT:
GROUND VERIFIED BY:
DATE:
MATRIX VERIFIED BY:
DATE:
244
COMP STEP #
REQUEST TO CAMP IN THE FIELD
TRAINING AREA AND/OR CANTONMENT
I, ___________________________________________, am requesting to use the following (circle one):
Camp Commanders Cabin
Ferrell Lake
Rest Area #3
Round Lake Recreation Area w/FEMA Trailer (Please Circle):
Lake Alott Recreation Area w/FEMA Trailer (Please Circle):
Deparq Woods w/FEMA Trailer (Please Circle):
Sylvan Dam Recreation Area
YES
/ NO
YES / NO
YES / NO
I will use the facility:
From (Date/Time):___________________________ To (Date/Time):___________________________
I understand that white lights are not authorized during night driving except in the case of an emergency. I
will follow the posted speed limit of 25 miles per hour and use seat belts when traveling. Furthermore, I
understand that no alcohol of any kind is permitted in the Camp Ripley Field Training Area. I will call
Range Control at 320-616-3137 prior to occupation to coordinate entrance to the training area. If Range
Control is closed, I understand that I am responsible to sign for a key to the E Gate prior to departing from
Range Control. I understand that failure to comply can result in a loss of privileges to use the facilities at
Camp Ripley.
Contact Number: ______________________________________________________________________
Number of guests: _______________
Names of each guest:
Camp Fire (Yes/No): ____________
Signature: ___________________________________________
Printed Name: _______________________________________
Guard Unit: _________________________________________
Date of Request: ____________________
CAMP RIPLEY OPERATIONS OFFICE (OPS PERSONNEL ONLY)
(Circle One)
Approved
/
Disapproved
Signature: ___________________________________________
Printed Name: ________________________________________
Range Control Notes:
245
EXPLOSIVE ORDNANCE INCIDENT REPORT
246
Appendix I
RANGE CONTROL TABLES
RC Table 1-1 OIC/RSO Requirements
RC Table Declinations
RC Table Medical Support Requirements
RC Table 2-2 PPE Requirements
RC Table Quick Reference
247
Range Control Table 1-1
Officer-in-Charge and Range Safety Officer requirements
1
Weapon System
Practice hand grenades; sub-caliber devices;
laser devices; firing devices; simulators and trip
flares; small arms and machine guns; and over8
water/ice crossing operations
2
Chemical agents and smoke
Aerial gunnery & air defense weapons; live
grenades, grenade launchers, and grenade
machine guns; live mines & demolitions; tanks
and fighting vehicle cannons
3
Field Artillery
Mortars
Air defense artillery rockets and guided missiles
Direct fire anti-tank rockets and missiles
Live-fire exercises using organic weapons,
squad through company, battery, troop
CALFEX/CAX using outside fire support, battery,
squad, platoon, company; or battalion and
6
larger
Rappel Tower (see NOTE below)
8
Sniper Known Distance
8
Sniper Fire and Maneuver
8
Reflexive Fire
EVOC
Confidence Course / Leader Reaction Course
Blanks
1
OFF
OIC
WO
OFF
RSO
WO
NCO
NCO
X
X
E-6
X
X
E-5
X
X
E-6
X
X
E-5
X
X
E-7
X
X
E-6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
E-7
E-6
X
X
5
X
X
E-6
4
E-6
E-7
X
X
X
X
X
X
E-7
X
X
E-7
X
X
E-7
X
X
E-6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
E-7
E-6
E-7
E-7
E-6
E-6
E-5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
E-5
E-5
E-6
E-6
E-5
E-5
E-5
E-6
ROTC Cadets, OCS students, and WOCs are not authorized to perform the duties of OIC and RSO on any live-fire
ranges. Officers and WOs that have not completed OBC/WOBC are not authorized to be OICs or RSOs on any livefire ranges.
Rappel Tower OIC/RSO requirements, per TC 21-24, dated 09 JAN 2008:
a. Ground and Wall-side Tower Rappelling: A fully qualified Rappel Safety Officer (RSO) (E-7 or above) may act as
the Rappel Master and range OIC. The Rappel Lane NCO (E-5 or above) will be the range RSO.
b. Helicopter Skid Rappelling: A Fully Qualified Rappel Safety Officer (E7 or above) will be the range OIC. A Fully
Qualified Rappel Master will be the range RSO. The OIC cannot be the RSO as well.
Notes:Civilians in the grade of GS-07 and above, or equivalent, may act as OIC; GS-05 and above, or
equivalent, may act as RSO.
2 For the Marine Corps, OIC and RSO must be E-4 and above and be chemical, biological, radiological, and
nuclear (CBRN) MOS 5702/5711 when conducting CBRN or smoke training. For the Army, OIC and RSO must be
CBRN qualified when conducting CBRN and smoke training.
3 Use of E-7s as OICs is authorized only when approved by the senior commander (Army)/installation commander
(Marine Corps). Either the battery executive officer or the platoon leader normally performs duties of the RSO.
4 RSO for the Marine Corps can be E-5 for mortar training activities.
5 SRO will be a CW3, CW03, or higher or civilian in the grade of GS-11 or above
6 For battalion or larger CALFEX/CAX, OIC will be a filed grade officer; exercise RSO will be E-7 or above
7 ROTC Cadets, OCS students, and WOCs are not authorized to perform the duties of OIC and RSO on any livefire ranges. Officers and WOs that have not completed OBC/WOBC are not authorized to be OICs or RSOs on any
live-fire ranges.
8 CRTC specific requirements for Sniper, Reflexive Fire, and water/ice training events
248
DECLINATION STATIONS ON CAMP RIPLEY
Range Control le DECLINATIONs
All aiming circles must be declinated prior to use when laying indirect fire weapon systems. The following
declination stations are located at:
a. STATION 1
b. STATION 2
UM 95780531
UM 88022470
c. STATION 3
d. STATION 4
UM 88441104
UM 90991474
Located in Cantonment Area 8, in front of the TMC
Located in Training Area 68, SE of the intersection of Kodiak road and
Easy street
Located in Training 18, west of Manilla Road
Located on the east side of Firing Point 2 on J Range
249
MEDICAL SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
Range Control Table Medical Support Requirements
st
Weapon system/Operational activity
Practice hand grenades only; sub-caliber devices; laser
devices; firing devices; simulators and trip flares; small arms
and machine guns; and over-water/ice crossing operations
1
Non-Live Fire Ranges and Training Areas
Driving Training Courses
Chemical agents and smoke
Live Fire Shoot House
Aerial gunnery & air defense weapons; live grenades,
grenade launchers, and grenade machine guns; live mines
& demolitions; tanks and fighting vehicle cannons
Airborne Operations for Personnel Drops ONLY
Field Artillery
Mortars
Air defense artillery rockets and guided missiles
Direct fire anti-tank rockets and missiles
Live-fire exercises using organic weapons, squad through
company, battery, troop
CALFEX/CAX using outside fire support, battery, squad,
6
platoon, company; or battalion and larger
Rappel Tower , Confidence Course, Field Leader Reaction
2
Course
Sniper Known Distance
Sniper Fire and Maneuver
Reflexive Fire
Confidence Course / Leader Reaction Course
CLS/1
responder
Certified Medic/EMT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1 Except for Rappel Tower, FLRC, and Confidence Course which requires a Medic/EMT with backboard and C
Collar
2 Due to the nature of training a qualified 68W Medic or a Certified EMT is required
250
Range Personal Protective Equipment Requirements
Table 2-2 Personal Protective Equipment
Personal protective level
Personal protection required
01
11
21
Army Combat uniform/standard utility uniform, hearing/eye protection
31
Body armor with front/back/side E-SAPI plates and helmet, hearing/eye protection
Body armor and helmet, hearing/eye protection
Body armor with front/back enhanced small arms protective insert (E-SAPI) plates and helmet,
hearing/eye protection
1 Eye protection is encouraged, Based on risk assessment, the unit commander may require ballistic and/or laser eye
protection.
NOTE: Ultimately, the commander must decide the appropriate level of PPE based on thorough risk
assessment.
Hand grenades
Personnel within the 150m danger area when casualty-producing hand grenades are thrown shall wear, at minimum,
PPE Level 1(Marine Corps), protective helmet and body armor (Army), and eye protection is encouraged. Refer to
le 2–2. Approved single hearing protection is required for all participating personnel when throwing bays are used.
Approved single hearing protection is recommended for all personnel participating in tactical exercises.
Grenade launchers and grenade machine guns
Protective helmet and body armor (Army) or PPE Level 1 (Marine Corps) will be worn when firing HE
ammunition; eye protection is encouraged. Refer to Table 2–2. Single hearing protection will be worn within 2m of
firing these grenade launchers. Protective helmet and body armor (Army) or PPE Level 1 must be used while
conducting firing of HE 40mm grenades. Eye protection is encouraged. Refer to le 2–2. Gunners, crew members
and other personnel at the firing position will wear protective helmet and body armor (Army) or PPE Level 1
(Marine Corps) at all times when firing HE ammunition. Eye protection is encouraged. Refer to le 2–2.
Antitank Rockets
Approved single hearing protection will be worn by personnel within 390m of the firing point when firing
antitank rockets. Approved single hearing protection will be worn by personnel within 500m of the firing point
when firing HE, HEAT, TP, smoke and illumination from the multi-role antiarmor antipersonnel weapons system
(MAAWS). The gunner and all other personnel within a 100m radius of the MAAWS must wear properly inserted
foam earplugs as well as properly fitting ear muffs (double hearing protection). Gunners and other personnel within
20m will wear personal protective gear such as improved body armor (IBA), ballistic eyewear, and helmets. Sleeves
should be down and collars up. For the Marine Corps, a minimum PPE Level 1 must be worn (see Table 2–2). Eye
protection is encouraged when firing shoulder-launched multipurpose assault weapons (SMAW).
Antitank Guided Missiles
For the Marine Corps, participating personnel not in Area F but within a rectangle 100m to either side and
200m to the rear of the TOW firing point will wear a minimum of PPE Level 1, as referenced in Table 2–2.
For the Marine Corps, all firings of the TOW missile require the use of the Kevlar protective blanket except when
TOW missiles are fired from the Light Armored Vehicle-Anti-Tank variant when all personnel are either within the
protective hull of the vehicle or clear of the launch position by 75m when missile firing is initiated.
FGM–148 Javelin guided missile
Personnel engaged in firing or supervising Javelin missile training will wear a minimum of PPE Level 1. Refer to le
2–2 (Marine Corps) for further guidance.
Grenade launchers
PPE Level 1 is recommended with hand protection for personnel within the SDZ. See Table 2–2.
Clothing will fit snugly to prevent red phosphorous fragments from getting inside battle dress uniforms,
particularly around the neck, ends of sleeves and pockets.
251
Mortars
All personnel who take part in mortar firing will wear, for the Army, a minimum of IBA and helmet; for the
Marine Corps, PPE Level 1. Refer to Table 2–2. At the commander’s discretion, the gunner may remove their
protective helmet while sighting the mortar. All personnel within the hearing hazard zone for the mortar, cartridge,
or charge increment used will wear approved single hearing protection. The hearing hazard zone is usually defined
in the manuals for the mortar or cartridges. If the hearing hazard zone information cannot be determined, single
hearing protection will be required within 200m.
Field Artillery
All personnel immediately engaged in artillery operations will wear a minimum of PPE Level 1, as referenced in le
2–2.
Aviation Range Safety
When the rocket with the M278 warhead is fired in the vicinity of friendly troops and personnel in an uncovered
position, ground personnel shall wear PPE Level 1.
Mines, Firing Devices, Trip Flares, Simulators, and Explosive Charges
All personnel within the SDZ will wear approved protective helmets and hearing protection for all detonations,
including while in the confines of missile-proof shelters. IBA, helmet, and hearing protection (Army)/PPE Level 1
(Marine Corps) will be worn by personnel within the SDZ but outside the missile-proof shelter. Eye protection
shouldbe worn. Charges placed on steel and concrete, for the Army, all personnel will wear approved protective
helmets, IBA and single hearing protection. For the Marine Corps, PPE Level 2. Eye protection is recommended.
IED Simulators
Hazard areas for IED simulators are contained in equipment instruction manuals and must be enforced at all times.
Personnel within the hazard area of a non-pyrotechnic IED simulator will wear the following PPE: eye protection,
single-hearing protection, and helmet.
DEMO BREACH
All personnel within the fragmentation distance of a detonation will wear appropriate protective gear. For the Army,
all personnel will wear approved protective helmets, IBA and single hearing protection. For the Marine Corps, PPE
Level 2. Eye protection will be worn. Personnel conducting the detonation will also wear fire-resistant hoods,
coveralls, and gloves. Clothing with short sleeves is not authorized when conducting this training.
252
RANGE REQUIREMENTS
Range Requirements QUICK REFERENCE Table
OIC/POC
RSO
SAFETY
MEMO
RM
Worksheet
LIVE FIRE
X
X
X
X
NON-LIVE
X
TRAINING AREA
X
SIMUNITIONS
NON-LETHAL
X
X
X
X
BLANKS
X
X
CS GAS
X
X
A-6 CONFIDENCE
COURSE
X
X
A-7 RAPPEL
X
X
A-15 FIELD LEADER
REACTION COURSE
X
X
WATER
OPERATIONS
X
X
X
3
X
ARNO / RIPLEY DZO
X
EVOC
X
4
X
5
X
Range Activity
X
X
X
BACKBOARD
C-COLLAR
1
2
X
X
X
X
X
X
1 The OIC/RSO must be chemical qualified and stated on the memo per Chapter 13 of the CRTC Range Regulation
2 The OIC/RSO must be qualified and stated on the memo per Chapter 2 of the CRTC Range Regulation
as Air Assault or Ranger. The helicopter skid pad is unauthorized to use unless you have a certified
Rappel Master.
3 Water Operations on Camp Ripley is defined as water survival training or bridging operations over water.
4 An RSO is only required if you are requesting an exception to policy to the posted speed limit.
5 A Safety Memorandum is only required if you are requesting an exception to policy to the posted speed limit.
253